NKC 11 PDF

NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
BASIC MATHEMATICS
IN PHYSICS
ETOOSINDIA
INDIA’S NO. 1 ONLINE COACHING
Plot No. 38, Near Union Bank of India, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar,
Kota, Rajasthan – 324005 Mob. : 9214233303
ETOOSINDIA N.K.C. SIR
EXERCISE-1
1 1 1
1. Find sum of 1       
2 4 8
1 3 2
(1) 2 (2) (3) (4)
2 2 3
2. Graph of equation 3x – 2y + 4 = 0 is–

y y y y
(1) (2) (3) x (4) x

x
x
3. Given that x = t2, y = 3t, then the relation between x and y is given by–
(1) parabola (2) circle (3) ellipse (4) straight line
I A
D
4. The graph between x and y is given in the figure then, x and y are related as–
y
N
parabola
(1) y 2  x (2) y  x 2
S I (3) y  x
x
(4) y 
1
x
O
5. Radius of circle is given by r = 2t2, then the rate of change of area at t = 1s is given by
(1) 4 (2) 8 (3) 12 (4) 16
6. In which part slope of graph is continuasly increasing–
TO y
A E
E
D
B
C x
o
(1) only in OA (2) only in AB (3) in BCD (4) only at E
dy
7. Find if y = sin(4x – 3)
dx
cos(4x  3) sin(4x  3)
(1)  cos(4x  3) (2) (3) (4) 4 cos(4x  3)
4 4
1
8. Find  2x  3 dx
(2x  3)2 log e (2x  3) (2x  3)
(1) c (2) c (3) log e (2x  3)  c (4) 2e
2 2
Plot No. 38, Near Union Bank of India, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Page # 2
9. Find A if 3 sin   4 cos   A sin(  )

(1) 7 (2) 1 (3) 5 (4) 25

10. Find  e x dx
0
(1) 1 (2) –1 (3)  (4) 0
11. The value of log10 (36) is [given log102 = 0.30 log103 = 0.48]
(1) 1.26 (2) 1.08 (3) 0.78 (4) 1.56
12. The expression ax = b is equivalent to–

(1) log a x  b (2) log x a  b (3) log a b  x (4) log b a  x
A
13. For the given graph the point of minima is/are–
I
y
x2 x3 x5
D
x
x1 x4
N
(1) only at x3 (2) only at x2 (3) at both x3 and x5 (4) only at x5
14. If sin  
(1)
2
14
2
5
then find tan 
(2)
5
14
S I (3)
14
5
(4)
2
21
15.
O
(1) 1 
O 
Find  1  
R
h2 2h

R2 R
h
2
if h << R
(2) 1 
2h
R
(3) 1 
2h
R
(4) 1 
h
R
16.
17.
E
(1)
T
Find sum and product of roots of equation 2x2 – 3x + 5 = 0
3 5
,
2 2
Find the value of  0.9961 / 4

(2)
2 5
,
3 2
(3)
5 2
,
2 5
(4) 3, 5
(1) 0.992 (2) 0.996 (3) 0.249 (4) 0.999
18. Velocity of a body is given by v = 4t2 – 2t then the correct a-t graph is–
a a a a
(1) t (2) t (3) t (4) t
19. The graph of equation y = 2x – 4x2 is–

y y y y
x
(1) x (2) x (3) (4)
x
1 1 1 1
20. Find 1     
2 4 8 16
3 2 1
(1) 2 (2) (3) (4)
2 3 2
21.  sin 4x dx
(1) 4 cos 4x  c
is–
(2) 4 sin 4x  c (3) 

cos 4x
c (4)
tan 4x
I
c
A
D
4 4
 d 
N
22. Magnetic flux is given by  = 2t2 – 3t + 4, then find induced emf at t = 2  e   dt 
I
(1) –5 unit (2) 5 unit (3) 6 unit (4) 3 unit
23. The value of sin 480° is–
24.
(1)
1
2
O
(2)
2
3
S (3) 
1
2
If x = a cos t and y = b sin t then the relation between x and y is given by (a  b)

(1) circle (2) ellipse (3) parabola (4) hyperbola
(4) 
3
2
O
44
25. The value of is
[4  0.01]4
T
(1)3.96 (2) 0.99 (3)4.01 (4)16.02
dy
E
26. If y = x sin x then find
dx
(1) x sin x + cos x (2) sin x + x cos x (3) x cos x (4) cos x
2
27. 
Find cos d
 sin 2 sin 2  cos 2  sin 2

(1)  c (2) c (3)  c (4) 
2 4 4 4 4 2 4
VECTORS
  
28. Two vectors A and B lie in a plane, another vector C lies outside this plane, then the resultant
ant
  
of these three vectors i.e. A  B  C :
(1) Can be zero (2) Cannot be zero
   
(3) Lies in the plane containing A & B (4) Lies in the plane containing B & C
   
29. Given that P  Q  P  Q . This can be true when :
   
(1) P  Q (2) Q0
   
(3) Neither P nor Q is a null vector (4) P is perpendicular to Q
30. The direction cosines of a vector î  ˆj  2 kˆ are :-
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(1) , ,1 (2) , , (3) , , (4) , ,
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
    
31. Two vectors A and B are such that A + B = C and A2 + B2 = C2. Which of the following
statements, is correct:-
   
(1) A is parallel to B (2) A is anti-parallel to B
   
(3) A is perpendicular to B (4) A and B are equal in magnitude
32. A vector perpendicular to 4 i  3 j may be :

(1) 4 i  3 j

e
(2) 7k
j
(3) 6 i (4) 3 i  4 j
I A
D
   
33. If A  3î  4ˆj and B  6î  8ˆj and A and B are the magnitudes of A and B , then which of the
following is not true ?
N
   A 1  
(1) A  B  0 (2)  (3) A.B  48 (4) A = 5
I
B 2
34. A force (3î  2ˆj) N displaces an object through a distance (2î  3ˆj) m. The work done is :
35.
(1) zero
O

(2) 12 J (3) 5 J (4) 13 J
S
A vector F1 is along the positive X-axis. If its vector product with another vector F2 is zero then

F2 may be :
O
(1) 4ˆj (2) – (î  ˆj ) (3) (î  kˆ) (4) (4î )
 
T
36. The magnitude of the vector product of two vectors A and B may not be :
(1) Greater than AB (2) Less than AB (3) Equal to AB (4) Equal to zero
E
  
37. If P  Q  R , then which of the following statements is not true :
         
(1) R  P (2) R  Q (3) R  (P  Q) (4) R  (P  Q)
 
38. The vector B  5î  2ˆj  Skˆ is perpendicular to the vector A  3î  ˆj  2kˆ if S =
(1) 1 (2) 4.7 (3) 6.3 (4) 8.5
39. The unit vector along î  ˆj is :

î  ˆj î  ˆj
(1) k̂ (2) î  ˆj (4) (3)
2 2
  
40 . What is the angle between A and the resultant of A  Bˆ and A  Bˆ ?    
1 A 1 B 1 A B
(1) 0° (2) tan  B  (3) tan  A  (4) tan  A  B 
     
EXERCISE-2

1. If F = (60 î + 15 ĵ – 3 kˆ ) N and v = (2 î – 4 ĵ + 5 k̂ ) m/s, then instantaneous power is :
(1) 195 watt (2) 45 watt. (3) 75 watt (4) 100 watt
   
2. The angle between vectors A  B and B  A is:   
 
(1) rad (2) rad (3) rad (4) zero
2 4
 
3. The unit vector parallel to the resultant of the vectors A  4iˆ  3jˆ  6kˆ and B  î  3ˆj  8kˆ is :
1  ˆ ˆ ˆ 1  ˆ ˆ ˆ 1  ˆ ˆ ˆ 1  ˆ ˆ ˆ
(1) 3i  6 j  2k (2) 3i  6 j  2k (3) 3i  6 j  2k (4) 3i  6 j  2k
7  7  49   49  
A
   
I
4. A vector A points vertically upward and B points towards north. The vector product A  B is
(1) zero (2) along west (3) along east (4) vertically downward
D
5. Which of the following sets of concurrent forces may be in equilibrium ?
(1) F1 = 3N, F2 = 5N, F3 = 1N (2) F1 = 3N, F2 = 5N, F3 = 9N
N
(3) F1 = 3N, F2 = 5N, F3 = 6N (4) F1 = 3N, F2 = 5N, F3 =15N
6.
7.
between them is :
(1) 60° (2) 90°
 
(3) 105°
S
(4) 120°
I
Two vectors of equal magnitude have a resultant equal to either of them in magnitude . The angle
A force of (3 i  4 j) newton acts on a body and displaces it by (3 i  4 j) metre. The work done by
 
O
the force is :
(1) 10J (2) 12J (3) 19J (4) 25J
O
 
8. The vector P  aiˆ  ajˆ  3kˆ and Q  aiˆ  2ˆj  kˆ are perpendicular to each other. The positive value
of a is :
T
(1) 3 (2) 2 (3) 1 (4) zero
9. The vector sum of two forces is perpendicular to their vector difference. In that case, the force :
10. E
(1) Are equal to each other. (2) Are equal to each other in magnitude.
(3) Are not equal to each other in magnitude.(4) Cannot be predicted.
 
If three vectors satisfy the relation A.B  0 and A.C  0 , then A can be parallel to
(1) C
 
(2) B
 
(3) B  C
 
(4) B.C
  
11. The direction of the angular velocity vector is along :
(1) the tangent to the circular path (2) the inward radius
(3) the outward radius (4) the axis of rotation
12. What is the projection of 3î  4kˆ on the y-axis ?
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 5 (4) zero
13. ˆ is perpendicular to the vector (4ˆj  4iˆ  k)

If a vector (2iˆ  3jˆ  8k) ˆ , then the value of  is :
(1) –1 (2) 1/2 (3) –1/2 (4) 1
14 . Square of the resultant of two forces of equal magnitude is equal to three times the product of
their magnitude. The angle between them is
(1) 0° (2) 45° (3) 60° (4) 90°
       
15. The vectors A and B are such that A  B  A  B . The angle between vectors A and B is -
(1) 90° (2) 60° (3) 75° (4) 45°
     
16 . If A  B = 3 A . B , then the value of A  B is :
FA I 1/ 2
A
(1) GH 2
B  2 AB
J
3K
(2) A + B (3) (A2 + B2 + 1/2 2 2
3 AB) (4) (A +B +AB)
1/2
17.

(1) 30°
  
If A  B  A.B , then the angle between A and B will be :
(2) 45° (3) 60°
 
18 . A unit radial vector r̂ makes agles of = 30° relative to the x-axis, = 60° ralative to the y-axis,
D
(4) 75°
I
N
and = 90° relative to the z-axis. The vector r̂ can be written as :
19.
(1)
1ˆ
2
i
2
3ˆ
j (2)
2
3 ˆ 1ˆ
i j
2
S I (3)
3
2ˆ 1 ˆ
i
3
j
If î, ˆj and kˆ represent unit vectors along the x, y and z-axes respectively, then the angle 
(4) None of these
O O
between the vectors ( î  ˆj  kˆ ) and ( î  ˆj ) is equal to :
1
(1) sin 
 1 

3
1
 2
(2) sin  
3
1
(3) cos 
 1 

3
(4) 90°
T

20. Find the torque of a force F  3iˆ  ˆj  5kˆ acting at the point r  7iˆ  3jˆ  kˆ
E
(1) 14iˆ  38ˆj  16kˆ (2) 4iˆ  4ˆj  6kˆ (3) 14iˆ  38ˆj  16kˆ (4) 21iˆ  3jˆ  5kˆ

21 . Six vectors, a through f have the magnitudes and directions indicated
in the figure. Which of the following statements is true ?

    b
  a c
(1) b  e  f (2) b  c  f
   
(3) d  c  f (4) d  e  f d e f
22. Find the linear velocity given   2kˆ and r  2î  2ˆj
(1) 4î  4 ˆj (2) 4kˆ  4î (3) 4 ˆj  4î (4) 4î  4ˆj
  
23. Let A  îAcos  ˆjAsin , be any vector. Another vector B which is normal to A is :
(1) îBcos  ˆjBsin (2) îBsin  ˆjBcos (3) îBsin  ˆjBcos (4) îAcos  ˆjAsin
24. Force 3N, 4N and 12N act at a point in mutually perpendicular directions. The magnitude of the
resultant force is :
(1) 19 N (2) 13 N (3) 11 N (4) 5 N
      
25. If vectors P , Q and R have magnitudes 5, 12 and 13 units and P  Q  R , the angle between Q

and R is :
1  5 1  5 1  12  1  2
(1) Cos   (2) Cos   (3) Cos   (4) Cos  
12 13 13 13
26 . The sum of magnitudes of two forces acting at a point is 16N. If the resultant force is 8N and its
direction is perpendicular to smaller force, then the forces are :
(1) 6N & 10N (2) 8N & 8N (3) 4N & 12N (4) 2N & 14N
x 
A
2
27 . At what angle must the two forces (x + y) and (x – y) act so that the resultant may be  y2 ?
I
  (x 2  y 2 )    2(x 2  y 2 )    (x 2  y 2 )   (x 2  y 2 ) 
(1) cos–1  2(x 2  y 2 )  (2) cos–1  x 2  y2  (3) cos–1  2
 x y 
2  (4) cos–1  x 2  y 2 
     
D
        
28 . Given that P = Q = R. If P  Q  R then the angle between P & R is 1. If P+Q+R  0 then the
 
angle between P & R is 2. What is the relation between 1 and 2 :
(1) 1 = 2
   
(2) 1 
2
2
I
(3) 1 = 22
N (4) None of the above
S
29 . Given that A  B  C  0 . Out of these three vectors two are equal in magnitude and the magnitude
of the third vector is 2 times as that of either of the two having equal magnitude. Then the
angles between vectors are given by :
O
(1) 30o, 60o, 90o (2) 45o, 45o, 90o (3) 45o, 60o, 90o (4) 90o, 135o, 135o
   
30 . The resultant of two vectors P and Q is R . If Q is doubled then the new resultant vector is
O

perpendicular to ' P '. Then R is equal to :
2 2
T
 P Q  P PQ
(1)  2PQ  (2) Q (3) (4)
  Q PQ
E
31. A vector of length is turned through the angle about its tail. What is the change in the position
vector of its head ?
(1)  cos  (2) 2 sin  (3) 2 cos  (4)  sin
32. The equation of a curve is given as y = x2 – 5x + 6. The curve intersects the x-axis at
(1)(2, 0) (2)(3, 0) (3)Both (1) and (2) (4)No where
dm
33 . At point P, value of is (where m is slope of graph)
dx
(1)Zero only when P is at lowest point of graph

(2)Positive or zero when P is at any position on graph
(3)Negative or zero
(4)Both (1) and (2)
A
34 . If y  , where A, a and b are positive constants, then for y to be minimum
a sin   bcos 
a b a2
(1) tan   (2) tan   (3)tan  = ab (4) tan  
b a b
T
2
35. Find the value of  sin 2 t dt, where  
0
T
A
T
(1)Zero (2) (3)2T (4)T
2
36. The integration of y from x0 to 4x0 along straight line shown in diagram is
4y0
y
D I
2y0
x0
I x
N
S
O 4x0
(1)5x0y0 (2)9x0y0 (3)3x0y0 (4)4x0y0
37.
(1)–1
O O
Sum of infinite number for series 1, 2, 4, 8,...........  is
37 3
(2)
1
3
(3)2 (4)
T
38. tan  cosec is
3 4
E
(1) 3  2 (2) 3  2 (3)  2 (4)zero
3
39 . If inclination  varies from 0 to 90° then

10m
(1)h < 0 (2)0 < h <  (3)0 < h < 10m (4)0 < h < 20
40. The area of a circle is given as s = R2. Where R is radius of circle. Find the change in area
of circle as radius increased from 10 cm to 10.001 cm
(1)0.01 cm2 (2)0.1 cm2 (3)0.02 cm2 (4)zero
EXERCISE-3
1.

The angle between vectors i  j and j  k is : e j e j
(1) 900 (2) 1800 (3) 00 (4) 600
2. The angle between two vectors given by (6î  6ˆj  3kˆ) and (7î  4 ˆj  4kˆ) is :
1  1  1  5  1  2  1
 5
(1) cos   (2) cos   (3) sin   (4) sin  3 
3 3 3  
3.  
If the vectors î  ˆj  kˆ and 3iˆ form two sides of a triangle, then area of the triangle is :
3
(1) 3 unit (2) 2 3 unit (3) unit (4) 3 2 unit
2
4. Which of the following pair of forces will never give resultant force of 2 N :
(1) 2 N and 2 N (2) 1 N and 1 N (3) 1 N and 3 N (4) 1 N and 4 N
I A
D
5.  
If n̂  aiˆ  bjˆ is perpendicular to the vector î  ˆj , then the value of a and b may be :
1 1
(1) 1, 0 (2) –2, 0 (3) 3, 0 (4) , 
N
2 2
6. Two forces, each numerically equal to 10 dyne are acting as shown in

the following figure. Their resultant is :
(1) 10 dyne
(3) 10 3 dyne
(2) 20 dyne
S I (4) 5 dyne
10
dy
ne
 = 60°
10 dyne
7.
(1)
O O
What is the component of (3î  4 ˆj ) along (î  ˆj ) ?
  
1 ˆ ˆ
2
 
ji (2)

3 ˆ ˆ
2

 
ji (3)
5 ˆ ˆ
2
 
ji (4)
7 ˆ ˆ
2
 
ji
T
8. If A  B  C and A + B = C, then the angle between A and B is :
 
(1) 0 (2) (3) (4) 
4 2
9.
10.
E
What is the value of A  B  A  B ?
(1) 0
    




 
(2) A2 – B2
 
If A  B  0 and B  C  0 , then the angle between A and C may be :
(1) zero (2)



(3) A2 + B2 + 2AB
(3)


(4) none of these
(4) none of these

4 2
    
11 . The resultant of A and B is perpendicular to A . What is the angle between A and B ?
–1  A –1  A –1  A –1  A
(1) cos   (2) cos    (3) sin   (4) sin   
B B B B
    
12. The resultant of A & B is R1 . On reversing the vector B , the resultant becomes R 2 . What is the
value of R12 + R 22 ?
(1) A2 + B2 (2) A2 – B2 (3) 2(A2 + B2) (4) 2(A2 – B2)
   
13. Given that A = B. What is the angle between (A+ B) and (A–B) ?
(1) 300 (2) 600 (3) 900 (4) 1800
       
14. The angle between the two vectors A  3 i  4 j  5 k and B  3 i  4 j  5 k will be :
(1) zero (2) 180° (3) 90° (4) 45°
15. The forces, which meet at one point but their lines of action do not lie in one plane, are called :
(1) non-coplanar and non-concurrent forces (2) coplanar and non-concurrent forces
(3) non-coplanar and concurrent forces (4) coplanar and concurrent forces
16. What happens, when we multiply a vector by (– 2) ?

(1) direction reverses and unit changes (2) direction reverses and magnitude is doubled
(3) direction remains unchanged and unit changes (4) none of these
I A
17. If a unit vector is represented by 0.5iˆ  0.8ˆj  ckˆ , then the value of 'c' is :
(1) 1 (2) 0.11 (3) 0.01
N D (4) 0.39
I

18. For a body, angular velocity (  ) = î –2 ĵ + 3 k̂ and radius vector ( r ) = î + ĵ + kˆ , then its velocity
is:
19.
(1) –5 î + 2 ĵ + 3 kˆ
(1) 2
(2) –5 î + 2 ĵ – 3 k̂
(2) 3
S (3) –5 î – 2 ĵ + 3 k̂
If the sum of two unit vectors is a unit vector, then the magnitude of their difference is :
O (3)
1
2
(4) –5 î – 2 ĵ – 3 k̂
(4) 5
O
     
20. The magnitudes of vectors A , B and C are respectively 12, 5 and 13 units and A  B  C , then
 
T
the angle between A and B is :
(1) 0 (2) 45° (3) /2 (4) /4
E
21 . The equation of given graph is as y = A sint. The area shaded in curve is
y
A
2
–A 1 t
2A A
(1)Zero (2)2A (3) (4)
 
22 . The value of log y x  log x y is
x y
(1)1 (2) (3) (4)xy
y x
1
23. 1 is
 ax  b dx
0
ab 1  a  b
(1)zero (2) log e (3)loge (ax + b) (4) log e  
b a b 
24. At point P and Q
y
P
Q
x
2
dy d y
(1) at point P is zero (2) at point Q is positive
dx dx 2
25.
(3)
d 2y
dx 2
at point P is negative
The induced emf is given e  

d
(4)All of above
. If  = sin t. The graph between emf ‘e’ and time ‘t’ is
I A
D
dt
e e e e
(1) t (2) t
I
(3)
N t (4) t
the direction of velocity–

a
S
26 . Shown here are the velocity and acceleration vectors for an object in several different types
of motion. In which case is the object slowing down and turning to the right when seen in
O a a
O
v
v
(1) (2) (3) (4)
a
27.
E T
Multiplying a vector by a negative scaler constant () gives :-
(1) A vector in same direction and having magnitude () times
(2) A vector in same direction and having magnitude (–) times
v
(3) A vector in opposite direction and having magnitude () times

(4) A vector in opposite direction and having magnitude (–) times
v
28 . For the given square PQRS, of side 'a' and centroid 'O' which of the following is incorrect:-
   a S a R
(1) PQ  QP  RO 
2
   a
(2) OQ  OR  OS  a O a
2
  
(3) PQ  PR  PS  2a
P a Q
  
(4) PQ  QR  QS  O
29. If â  bˆ  3 , then â  bˆ may be :-
3
(1) 1 (2) (3) Either (1) or (2) (4) None of the above
2
 
30 . If y = sin 4x then find average value of y in interval 0, 
 4
2 4 8
(1) 0 (2) (3) (4)
  
dy
31. If y  4  x 2 find value of
dx
A
x x 2x 2x
(1) (2) (3)  a  x 2 (4)
I
2
4x 4x 4  x2

32. A force F  2iˆ  ˆj  3kˆ displaces a particle from origin to point (1, 2, 3). Calculate work done in
this process and find torque at point (1, 2, 3) :-

(1) 9J, 9iˆ  3ˆj  5kˆ  
(2) 9J, 9iˆ  3ˆj  5kˆ  
D
(3) 13J, 9iˆ  3ˆj  5kˆ
N
 (4) None
I

33. Vector p makes angle  with x, y, z axes respectively. Then cos2 + cos2 – sin2 = ?
(1) – 1 (2) 0 (3) 1 (4) 2
34.
O
B
R
S
O

A
  
T
R is resultant of A and B . If 2R  3B then find  :-
(1) 75° (2) 45° (3) 60° (4) 30°
E

35 . For the given vector A  3i  4j  10k , the ratio of magnitude of its component on the x-y plane
and the component on z-axis is :
1
(1) 2 (2) (3) 1 (4) None
2
36. The value of  in interval [0, 90º] for which 10 sin2  – 11 sin  + 3 = 0
(1)37º (2)45º (3)53º (4)60º
37 . The least value of 4 cos x + 3 sin x is

(1)5 (2)–5 (3)7 (4)–7
38 . What is the maximum value of (4 – cos ).

(1)4 (2)5 (3)3 (4)zero
d  x 
39.   is equal to
dx  ln x 
x 1 1 1 1x 1  x2
(1) (2)  (3) (4)
 ln x 
2
ln x  ln x  2  ln x 
2
 ln x  2
40. The sum of first ‘n’ natural numbers is given by

2
n2 n  n  1 2n  1 n  n  1  n  n  1 
(1) (2) (3) (4)  
2 6 2  2 
I A
N D
S I
O O
E T
ANSWERS
EXERCISE – 1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. 1 1 1 2 4 3 4 2 3 1 4 3 3 4 3
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 1 4 1 2 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 3
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 3 2 3 1 4 1 4 4 3 1
EXERCISE – 2
A
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
I
Ans. 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 3 1
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 4 2 2 1 1 4 3 3 2 3 1 1 2 4 2
D
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 2 3 2 1 2 2 4 1 2 3
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
I
EXERCISE – 3
8 9
N
10 11 12 13 14 15
S
Ans. 4 4 3 4 4 1 4 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 3
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 2 2 1 2 3 3 1 4 4 4 2 3 3 1 2
O
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 2 2 3
TO
E
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
KINEMATICS
ETOOSINDIA
EXERCISE-1
1. Two balls are thrown simultaneously, (A) vertically upwards with a speed of 20 m/s from the
ground and (B) vertically downwards from a height of 40 m with the same speed and along the
same line of motion. At which point the balls will collide :–
(take g = 10 m/sec2)
(A) 15 m above from the ground (B) 15 m below from the top of the tower
(C) 20 m above from the ground (D) 20 m below fromt the top of the tower
2. If an iron ball and a wooden ball of the same radius are released from a height h in vacuum
A
then time taken by both of them to reach ground will be :–
I
(A) unequal (B) exactly equal (C) roughly equal (D) zero
D
3. The velocity acquired by a body moving with uniform acceleration is 30 ms–1 in 2 seconds
and 60 ms–1 in 4 seconds. The initial velocity is :–
(B) 2 ms–1 (C) 4 ms–1 (D) 10 ms–1
N
(A) zero
4.
acceleration is :–
S I
If a body starts from rest, the time in which it covers a particular displacement with uniform
(A) inversely proportional to the square root of the displacement
O
(B) inversely proportional to the displacement
(C) directily proportional to the displacement
(D) directly proportional to the square root of the displacement
5.
TO
A car accelerates from rest at a constant rate of 2 m/s2 for some time. Then, it retards at a
constant rate of 4 m/s2 and comes to rest. If it remains in motion for 3 second, then the
maximum speed attained by the car is :–
6. E
(A) 2 m/s (B) 3 m/s (C) 4 m/s (D) 6 m/s
The water drops fall at regular intervals from a tap 5 m above the ground. The third drop is
leaving the tap at the instant the first drop touches the ground. How far above the ground is
the second drop at that instant ?
(A) 1.25 m (B) 2.50 m (C) 3.75 m (D) 4.00 m
7. If a ball is thrown vertically upwards with 40 m/s. its velocity after two second will be :–
(A) 10 m/s (B) 20 m/s (C) 30 m/s (D) 40 m/s
8. A stone dropped from the top of a tower of height h. After 1 second another stone is dropped
from the balcony 20 m below the top. Both reach the bottom simultaneously. What is the
value of h ? (take g = 10 ms–2 )
(A) 3125 m (B) 312.5 m (C) 31.25 m (D) 25.31 m
9. A stone is dropped from a certain height which can reach the ground in 5 seconds. It is
stopped after 3 second of its fall and then is again released. The total time taken by the
stone to reach the groud will be :–
(A) 6 s (B) 6.5 s (C) 7 s (D) 7.5 s
10. With what speed should a body be thrown upwards so that the distances traversed in 5th
second and 6th second are equal ?
(A) 58.4 m/s (B) 49 m/s (C) 98 m/s
I A
(D) 98 m/s
11.
N D
A body is imparted motion from rest to move in a straight line. It is then obstructed by an
I
opposite force, then :–
(A) the body may necessarily change direction
S
(B) the body is sure to slow down
(C) the body will necessarily continue to move in the same direction at the same speed
(D) none of the above.
O O
12. Which of the following four statements is false?
(A) A body can have zero velocity and still be accelerated
(B) A body can have a constant velocity and still have a varying speed
(C) A body can have a constant speed and still have a varying velocity
T
(D) The direction of the velocity of a body can change when its acceleration is constant.
E
13. If a car at rest accelerates uniformly to a speed of 144 km/h in 20 second, it covers a
distance of :–
(A) 20 m (B) 400 m (C) 1440 m (D) 2980 m
14. A body starts from rest, what is the ratio of the distance travelled by the body during the 4th
and 3rd second ?
(A) 7/5 (B) 5/7 (C) 7/3 (D) 3/7
15. If a body starts from rest and travels 120m in the 8th second, then acceleration is :–
(A) 16 m/s2 (B) 10 m/s2 (C) 0.227 m/s2 (D) 0.03 m/s2
16. If a train travelling at 72 km/h is to be brought to rest in a distance of 200 m, then its
retardation should be :–
(A) 20 m/s2 (B) 2 m/s2 (C) 10 m/s2 (D) 1 m/s2
17. A car moving with a speed of 40 km/hr can be stopped by applying brakes after at least
2m. If the same car is moving with a speed of 80 km/hr., what is the minimum stopping
distance ?
(A) 2 m (B) 4 m (C) 6 m (D) 8 m
18. A car moving with a velocity of 10 m/s can be stopped by the application of a constant force
A
F in a distance of 20m. If the velocity of the car is 30 m/s. It can be stopped by this force in :–
(A) 20/3 m (B) 20 m (C) 60 m (D) 180 m
D
19. A body is dropped from a tower with zero velocity, reaches ground in 4s. The height of the
tower is about :–
I
N
(A) 80 m (B) 20 m (C) 160 m (D) 40 m
S I
20. A particle starts from rests and travels a distance S with uniform acceleration, then it travels
a distance 2S with uniform speed, finally it travels a distance 3S with uniform retardation
and comes to rest. If the complete motion of the particle is a straight line then the ratio
O
of its average velocity to maximum velocity is :–
6 4 3 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
O
7 5 5 5
E T
21. A body is thrown vertically upwards from the top A of a tower. It reaches the ground in
t1 seconds. If it is thrown vertically downwards from A with the same speed it reaches the
ground in t2, seconds. If it is allowed to fall freely from A, then the time it takes to reach the
ground is given by :–
t1  t 2 t1  t 2 t1
(A) t  (B) t  (C) t  t1t 2 (D) t 
2 2 t2
22. A particle is dropped vertically from rest, from a height. The time taken by it to fall through
successive distances of 1 km each will then be :–
(A) all equal, being equal to second.
(B) in the ratio of the square roots of the integers 1: 2 : 3
(C) in the ratio of the difference in the square roots of the integers,
i.e., 1,,( 2  1),( 3  2 ),( 4  3 ) .......
1 1 1
(D) in the ratio of the reciprocals of the square roots of the integers, ie., , , .....
1 2 3
23. A ball is thrown upward with a velocity of 100 m/s. It will reach the ground after :–
(A) 10 s (B) 20 s (C) 5 s (D) 40 s
A
GRAPHI CAL ANALYSI S
I
24. Fig. shows the displacement of a particle going along x-axis as a function of time. The
acceleration of the particle is zero in the region :–
D
(a) AB
displacement
(b) BC B C
E
N
(c) CD
A D
I
(d) DE time
(A) a, b (B) a, c (C) b, d (D) c, d
x x
S
25. A car starts from rest accelerates uniform by for 4 second and then moves with uniform
velocity which of the x-t graph represent the motion of the car :–
O x x
O
(A) (B) (C) (D)
t t t t
E T
26. A graph between the square of the velocity of a particle and the distance (s) moved is
shown in figure. The acceleration of the particle in kilometers per hour square is :–
4600
v2 2
(km/hr)
900
s(km) 0.6
(A) 2250 (B) 3084 (C) – 2250 (D) – 3084
27. The fig. shows the displacement time graph of a particle moving on a straight line path.
What is the magnitude of average velocity of the particle over 10 seconds ?
60
x(in metre)
40
30
20
10
0
2 4 6 8 10t sec)
(A) 2 ms–1 (B) 4 ms–1 (C) 6 ms–1
I A
(D) 8 ms–1
shown in figure. His average velocity for the whole time interval is :–
N D
28. A person walks along an east-west street and a graph of his displacement from home is
40
S I
x (meter)
O
20
15 18 19 21
0
3 6 9 12 t (sec)
TO –20
–40
E
(A) 0 ms–1 (B) 23 ms–1 (C) 8.4 ms–1 (D) None of above
29. In the following velocity time graph of a body the distance travelled by the body and its
displacement during 5 second in meter will be :–
40
30
20
velocity
10
A
0
I
1 2 3 4 5 t (in sec)
–10
–20
–30
–40
N D
(A) 75, 75 (B) 110, 70
S I
(C) 110, 110
30. A body is projected vertically upward from the surface of the earth, then the velocity-time
(D) 110, 40
graph is :–
O O
v
v
v v
T
(A) (B) (C) (D)
t
t t t
E
31. A rocket is launched upward from the earth surface whose velocity time graph shown in
figure. Then maximum height attained by the rocket is :–
A
1000
v(ms )
–1
B 140
0 t(s)
20 40 60 80 100 120 C
(A) 1km (B) 10km (C) 100km (D) 60 km
32. In above question covered height by the rocket before retardation is :–

(A) 1 km (B) 10 km (C) 20 km (D) 60 km
33. In above question mean velocity of rocket during it attained the maximum height :–
(A) 100 ms–1 (B) 50 ms–1 (C) 500 ms–1 (D) 25/3 ms–1
34. In above question the retardation of rocket is :–

(A) 50 ms–2 (B) 100 ms–2 (C) 500 ms–2 (D) 10 ms–2
35. In above question the acceleration of rocket is :–

(A) 50 ms–2 (B) 100 ms–2 (C) 10 ms–2
I A
(D) 1000 ms–2
N D
36. In above question the rocket goes up and get down on the following parts respectively :–
I
(A) OA and AB (B) AB and BC (C) OA and ABC (D) OAB and BC
O 3
2
S
37. For motion of a particle acceleration time graph is shown in figure then the velocity time
curve for the duration of 0-4 sec is :–
TO 1
0
–1
–2
1 23 4 t(s)
E
–3
6
5
6 4
5 3
velocity
velocity
4 2
3 1
(A) 2 (B) 0
1 1 2 3 4 t
–1
0 –2
1 2 3 4 t
–3
a(in m/s2) 3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
1 2 3 4 t(s) t(s)
(C) –1 (D) –1
–2 –2
–3 –3
38. A ball is dropped from the certain height on the surface of glass. It is collide elastically the
comes back to initial position. If this process it repeated then the velocity time graph is :–
I A
ve locit y
D
ve locit y
N
T 2T
I
(A) T 2T t (B) t
O S
velocit y
ve locit y
T 2T 2T
(C) t (D) T t
TO
E
39. A particle start from rest and move with constant acceleration. Than velocity displacement
curve is :–
v v v v
(A) (B) (C) (D)
s s s s
40. For a body of 50 kg. mass, the velocity time graph is shown in figure. Then force acting on
the body is :–
2
1
1 2 t(s)
A
(A) 25N (B) 50 N (C) 12.5 N (D) 100 N
D
41. The displacement-time graph of a moving particle is shown. The instantaneous velocity of
the particle is negative at the point :– I
N
displacement
I
D
E
S
C F
O
time
(A) D (B) F (C) C (D) E
TO
42. Figure below shows the velocity-time graph of a one dimensional motion. Which of the
following characteristic of the particle is represented by the shaded area?
E v
t
O
(A) Speed (B) Displacement (C) Acceleration (D) Momentum
43. The graph between the displacement x and time t for a particle moving in a straigh lin eis
shown in figure. During the interval OA, AB, BC and CD, the acceleration of the particle is:
displacement
D
B C
A
O X
time
OA,
(A) +
AB,
0
BC,
+
CD
+
I A
D
(B) – 0 + 0
(C) + 0 – +
(D) – 0 – 0
GROUND TO GROUND PROJECTI ON
I N
S
44. In the graph shown in fig. the time is plotted along x-axis. Which quantity associated with
the projectile motion is plotted along the y - axis :–
O O y
E T
(A) kinetic energy (B) momentum
time (t) x
(C) horizontal velocity(D) none of the above
45. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v making an angle 45° with the horizontal.
The magnitude of the angular momentum of the projectile about the point of projection
when the particle is at its maximum height h, is :–
mv 3 mv 3
(A) zero (B) (C) (D) m2 2gh3
4 2g 2g
46. In case of a projectile fired at an angle equally inclined to the horizontal and vertical with
velocity (u). The horizontal range is :–
u2 u2 2u2 u2
(A) (B) (C) (D) 2
g 2g g g
47. A shell is fired vertically upwards with a velocity v1 from the deck of a ship travelling at a
speed of v2. A person on the shore observes the motion of the shell as parabola. Its horizontal
range is given by :–
2v12 v 2 2v1v 22
A
2v12 v 22
2v1v 2
I
(A) (B) (C) (D)
g g g g
range when fired at 45° with same speed :–
N D
48. The range of a projectile when fired at 75° with the horizontal is 0.5 km. what will be its
I
(A) 0.5 km. (B) 1.0 km. (C) 1.5 km. (D) 2.0 km.
(A) u cos  (B) u tan 

S
49. A particle is projected with a velocity u making an angle  with the horizontal. At any
instant, its velocity v is at right angles to its initial velocity u; then v is:–
O
(C) u cot  (D) u sec 
TO
50. The speed at the maximum height of a projectile is
projection. Its range on the horizontal plane :–

2
3
times of its inital speed 'u' of
E
(A)
3u2
2g
(B)
u2
2g
(C)
3u2
2g
(D)
3u2
g
51. A ball is thrown at an angle  with the horizontal and the range is maximum. The value of tan is :–
1
(A) 1 (B) 3 (C) (D) 2
3
52. A student is able to throw a ball vertically to maximum height of 40 m. The maximum distance
to which the student can throw the ball in the horizontal direction :–
(A) 40 (B)1/2 m (B) 20(B)1/2m (C) 20 m (D) 80 m
53. Three projectile A, B and C are thrown from the same point in the same plane. Their
trajectories are shown in the figure. Then which of the following statement is true :–
O ABC
A
(A) The time of flight is the same for all the three
I
(B) The launch speed is greatest for particle C
(C) The horizontal velocity component is greatest for particle C
(D) All of the above
54. A projectile is thrown with an initial velocity of 

D
v = a î + b ĵ , if the range of projectile is
N
I
double of maximum height reached by it then :–
(A) a = 2 b (B) b = a (C) b = 2a (D) b = 4a
55. The equation of a projectile is y = 3 x –
(A) 30°
O (B) 60°
gx 2
2
S
the angle of projection is :–
(C) 45° (D) none
TO
56. The equation of projectile is y = 16x –
(A) 16 m (B) 8 m
x2
4
the horizontal range is :–
(C) 64 m (D) 12.8 m
E
57. If a projectile is fired at an angle  with the vertical with velocity u, then maximum height
attained is given by :–
(A)
u2 cos 
(B)
u2 sin2 
(C)
u2 sin2 
(D)
u2 cos2 
2g 2g g 2g
58. If R is the maximum horizontal range of a particle, then the greatest height attained by it
is:–
(A) R (B) 2R (C) R/2 (D) R/4
59. Two stones are projected with the same speed but making different angles with the hori-

zontal. Their ranges are equal. If the angle of projection of one is and its maximum
3
height is y 1 then the maximum height of the other will be :–
y1 y1
(A) 3y1 (B) 2y1 (C) (D)
2 3
60. A projectile is thrown from a point in a horizontal plane such that its horizontal and vertical
velocity component are 9.8 m/s and 19.6 m/s respectively. its horizontal range is :–
(A) 4.9 m (B) 9.8 m (C) 19.6 m (D) 39.2 m
I A
D
61. A particle is projected with a velocity v, so that its range on a horizontal plane is twice the
greatest height attained. If g is acceleration due to gravity, then its range is :–
4v 2 4v 3
N
4g 4v
I
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5g 5v 2 5g2 5g2
O
where the velocity of the projectile is minimum are :–
(A) (400, 100) (B) (200, 100)
S
62. A projectile is thrown into space so as to have the maximum possible horizontal range
equal to 400m. Taking the point of projection as the origin, the coordinates of the point
(C) (400, 200) (D) (200, 200)
TO
63. A particle is fired with velocity u making angle  with the horizontal. What is the change in
velocity when it is at the highest point ?
E
(A) u cos  (B) u (C) u sin  (D) (u cos– u)
64. In the above, the change in speed is :–

(A) u cos  (B) u (C) u sin  (D) (u cos– u)
65. An arrow is shot into the air. Its range is 200 metres and its time of flight is 5 s. If the value
of g is assumed to be 10 ms–2, then the horizontal component of the velocity of arrow is :–
(A) 25 m/s (B) 40 m/s (C) 31.25 m/s (D) 12.5 m/s
66. In the Q.110, the maximum height attained by the arrow is :–

(A) 25 m (B) 40 m (C) 31.25 m (D) 12.5 m
67. In the Q.110, the vertical component of the velocity is :–

(A) 25 m/s (B) 40 m/s (C) 12.5 m/s (D) 31.25 m/s
68. In the Q.110, the angle of projection with the horizontal is :–
1  4  1  5  1  5  1  8 
(A) tan   (B) tan   (C) tan   (D) tan  
A
5 4 8 5
D
69. The ceiling of a hall is 40m high. For maximum horizontal distance, the angle at which the
ball can be thrown with a speed of 56ms–1 without hitting the ceiling of the hall is (take g =
9.8 m/s2) :–
I
(A) 25° (B) 30° (C) 45°
I N
(D) 60°
(A)
O
then y1 + y2 =... :–
u2
(B)
2u 2
S
70. A ball is thrown at different angles with the same speed u and from the same point and it
has the same range in both the case. If y1 and y2 be the heights attained in the two cases,
(C)
u2
(D)
u2
O
g g 2g 4g
E T
71. Two balls A and B are thrown with speed u and
u
2
respectively. Both the balls cover the
same horizontal distance before returning to the plane of projection. If the angle of projection
of ball B is 15° with the horizontal, then the angle of projection of A is :–
1  1  1 1  1  1 1  1  1 1  1 
(A) sin   (B) sin   (C) sin   (D) sin  
8 2 8 3 8 4 8
72. At what angle with the horizontal should a ball be thrown so that its range R is related to the
time of flight as R = 5T2. Take g = 10 ms–2 :–
(A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 60° (D) 90°
73. A projectile is projected with initial velocity (6iˆ  8 ˆj) m/s. If g = 10 ms–2, then horizontal
range is :–
(A) 4.8 metre (B) 9.6 metre (C) 19.2 metre (D) 14.0 metre
74. If the range of a gun which fires a shell with muzzle speed v, is R, then the angle of elevation
of the gun is :–
v2 1   Rg  1 1  v 2  1 1  Rg 
(A) cos  Rg  (B) cos1  2  (C) 2 sin  Rg  (D) sin  2 
  v    2 v 
75. The maximum range of a projectile fired with some initial velocity is found to be 1000
I A
D
metre The maximum height (H) reached by this projectile is :–
(A) 250 metre (B) 500 metre (C) 1000 metre (D) 2000 metre
I N
76. The angle which the velocity vector of a projectile, thrown with a velocity v at an angle to
the horizontal, will make with the horizontal after time t of its being thrown up is :–
(A) 
O
1  v cos  
(C) tan  v sin   gt 
S 1   
(B) tan  
t
1  v sin   gt 
(D) tan  
O
   v cos  
E T
77. A particle is projected at an angle of 45° from 8m before the foot of a wall, just touches the
top of the wall and falls on the ground on the opposite side at a distance 4 m from it.The
height of wall is :–
(A) 2/3m (B) 4/3m (C) 8/3m (D) 3/4m
PROJECTI ON FROM HEI GHT

78. A body is thrown horizontally with a velocity 2gh from the top of a tower of height h. It
strikes the level ground through the foot of the tower at a distance x from the tower. The
value of x is :–
(A) h (B) h/2 (C) 2 h (D) 3/4m
79. When a particle is thrown horizontally, the resultant velocity of the projectile at any time t is given
by :–
(A) gt (B) 1/2 gt2 (C) u2  g2 t 2 (D) u2  g2 t 2
80. A ball is projected upwards from the top of a tower with a velocity of 50 ms–1 making an
angle of 30° with the horizontal. The height of the tower is 70m. After how much time from
the instant of throwing will the ball reach the ground ?
(A) 2 s (B) 5 s (C) 7 s (D) 9 s
81. An aeroplane moving horizontally with a speed of 180 km/hr. drops a food packet while
flying at a height of 490m. The horizontal range of the packet is :–
I A
D
(A) 180 m (B) 980 m (C) 500 m (D) 670 m
(A) 55° (B) 45° (C) 60°

I N
82. A plane is flying horizontally at 98 ms– 1 and releases an object which reaches the ground
in 10 s. The angle made by it while hitting the ground is :–
(D) 75°
O S
83. A stuntman plans to run across a roof top and then horizontally off it to land on the roof of
next building. The roof of the next building is 4.9 metre below the first one and 6.2 metre
away from it. What should be his minimum roof top speed in m/s, so that he can successfully
O
make the jump ?
(A) 3.1 (B) 4.0 (C) 4.9 (D) 6.2
E T
84. From the top of a tower 19.6 m high, a ball is thrown horizontally. If the line joining the point
of projection to the point where it hits the ground makes an angle of 450 with the horizontal,
then the initial velocity of the ball is :–
(A) 9.8 ms–1 (B) 4.9 ms–1 (C) 14.7 ms–1 (D) 2.8 ms–1
85. A bomber is flying horizontally with a constant speed of 150 m/s at a height of 78.4 m. The
pilot has to drop a bomb aty the enemy target. At what horizontal distance from the target
should he release the bomb ?
(A) 0 m (B) 300 m (C) 600 m (D) 1000 m
20
86. A particle is projected horizontally with speed m / s , from some height at t = 0. At which
3
time its velocity will make 60° angle with initial velocity
20
m/s
3
(A) 1 sec (B) 2 sec (C) 1.5 sec (D) 2.5 sec
I A
makes 60° angle with initial velocity
N D
87. In the above question what will be the displacemtn of particle in x-direction when its velocity
(A)
20
3
(B)
40
3
S I (C)
50
3
(D)
10
3
O
88. A boy want to jump from building A to building B Height of building A is 25 m and of building
B is 5m. Distance between buildings Roof is 4m. Assume boy jump horizontally, then
calculate min velocity with which boy has to jump to land safely on building B.
TO 25m
E A
4m
B 5m
(A) 6 m/s (B) 8 m/s (C) 4 m/s (D) 2 m/s
89. Two particles A & B are projected from a building. A is projected with speed 2V & angle
30° with horizontal & B with speed v & angle 60° with horizontal, which particle will hit the
ground earlier
V (B)
2V
60°
(A)
30°
A
h
D I
(A) Particle A
(B) Particle B
(C) Particle A & B will hit at same time
I N
S
(D) None of these
O
90. A ball was thrown from height H and the ball hit the floor with velocity 10(iˆ  ˆj) after 1.5sec
of its projection. Find initial speed of ball.
O
E T H
 y
v=10=(i-j)
(A) 10 5 m / s (B) 5 5 m / s (C) 15 m/s (D) 30 m/s
91. In the above questions find angle of projection 
1  3  1  1 
(A)   tan   (B)   tan   (C)  = tan–1 (B) (D)  = tan–1 (A)
2 2
RELATIVE MOION IN ONE DIMENSION

92. A train moves in north direction with a speed of 54 km/hr. and a monkey running on the roof
of the train, against its motion with a velocity of 18 km/hr. with respect to the train, then the
velocity of monkey as observed by a man standing on the ground :–
(A) 5 ms–1 due south (B) 25 ms–1 due south
A
(C) 10 ms–1 due south (D) 10 ms–1 due north
93. A boat takes 2 hours to go 8 km and come back in still water lake. With water velocity of
4km/hr,the time taken for going upstream of 8 km and coming back is :–
(A) 140 min (B) 150 min (C) 160 min
D
(D) 170 min I
I N
94. Four person P, Q, R and S of same mass travel with same speed u along a square of side
'd' such that each one faces the other always. After how much time they will meet each
S
other
O
P Q
u
TO u
S
u R
d
E
(A)
d
u
(B)
2d
3u
(C)
2d
u
(D) d 3u
95. Six person of same mass travel with same speed u along regular hexagon of side 'd' such
that each one faces the other always. After how much time they will meet each other
u u
u u
d
u u
(A)
d
u
(B)
2d
3u
(C)
2d
u
I
(D) d 3u
A
N D
96. A person walks up a stalled escalator in 90 sec. When standing on the same escalator
now moving, he is carried in 60s. The time he would take to walk up the moving escalator
I
will be :–
(A) 27 s (B) 72 s (C) 18 s (D) 36 s
O
ground is :–
(A) 1500 km/h (B) 2000 km/h
S
97. A jet air plane travelling at a speed of 500 km/h ejects its products of combustion at a speed of
1500km/h relative to the jet plane. The speed of the latter with respect to an observer on the
(C) 1000 km/h (D) 500 km/h
TO
98. A train of 150m length is going towards north direction at a speed of 10 ms–1. A parrot flies
at a speed of 5ms–1 towards south direction parallel to the railway track. The time taken by
the parrot to cross the train is equal to :–
E
(A) 12 s (B) 8 s (C) 15 s (D) 10 s
99. Two trains, each 50m long, are travelling in opposite directions with velocity 10 m/s and
15 m/s. The time of crossing is :–
(A) 2 s (B) 4 s (C) 2 3 s (D) 4 3 s
100. Two cars are moving in the same directions with the same speed of 30 km/hr. They are
separated by 5 km. What is the speed of car moving in the opposite direction if it meets
the two cars at an interval of 4 minute :–
(A) 45 km/hr. (B) 60 km/hr (C) 105 km/hr (D) None
101. A stone is thrown upwards and it rises to a height of 200 m. The relative velocity of the
stone with respect to the earth will be maximum at :–
(A) Height of 100 m (B) Height of 150 m (C) Heighest point (D) The ground
102. A body is projected vertically up at t = 0 with a velocity of 98 m/s. Another body is projected
from the same point with same velocity after time 4 seconds. Both bodies will meet after :–
(A) 6 s (B) 8 s (C) 10 s (D) 12 s
103. A bus starts from rest moving with acceleration 2ms–2. A cyclist 96 m. behind the bus starts
A
simutaneously towards the bus at 20 m/s. After what time he will be able to overtake the bus :–
(A) 8 s (B) 10 s (C) 12 s (D) 14 s
D
104. A body released from a height falls freely towards earth. Another body is released from the
same height exactly one second later. The separation between the two bodies two second
I
N
after the release of the second body is :–
I
(A) 9.8 m (B) 49 m (C) 24.5 m (D) 19.6 m
O S
105. Two towns A and B are connected by a regular bus service with a bus leaving in either
direction every T minutes. A man cycling with a speed of 20 km h–1 in the direction A to B
notices that a bus goes past him every 18 min in the direction of his motion, and every 6
min in the opposite direction. What is the period T of the bus service and with what speed
(assumed constant) do the buses ply on the road ?
O
(A) T = 9 min., Speed = 40 km h–1
(C) T = 9 min., Speed = 20 km h–1
T
(B) T = 10 min., Speed = 40 km h–1
(D) T = 10 min., Speed = 20 km h–1
E
106. Two bodies move in a straight line towards each other at initial velocities v1 and v2 and with
constant acceleration a1 and a2 directed against the corresponding velocities at the initial
instant. The maximum initial separation l max between the bodies for which they will meet
during the motion is.
v12 v 22 (v1  v 2 )2 v1v 2 v12  v 22

(A)  (B) (C) a a (D)
a1 a2 2(a1  a2 ) 1 2 (a1  a2 )
107. A lift is moving downwards with acceleration a. A ma in the lift drops a ball inside the lift.
The acceleration of the ball as observed by the man in the lift and a man standing stationary
on the ground are respectively :
(A) g, g (B) g –a, g – a (C) g –a, g (D) a, g
108. A train moves towards East with a speed of 20 m/s. A person is running on the roof of the
train with a speed 3 m/s against the motion of train. Velocity of the person as seen by an
observer on ground will be :
(A) 23 m/s towards East (B) 17 towards East
(C) 23 towards West (D) 17 towards West
109. A long horizontal belt is moving from left to right with a uniform speed 2 m/s. There are two
ink marks A and B on the belt 60 m apart. An insect runs on the belt to and fro between A
and B such that its speed relative to belt is constant and equals 4 m/s. When the insect is
moving on the belt in the direction of motion of the belt, its speed as observed by a person
standing on ground will be:
A
(A) 6 m/s (B) 2 m/s (C) 1.5 m/s (D) 4 m/s
110. In the last Question 155, if A lies to the left of B, then:
D
(A) time taken by insect to travel from A to B and time taken by it to travel from B to A are
equal
(B) time taken by insect to travel from A to B is less than time taken by it to tavel from B to
I
N
A
I
(C) time taken by insect to travel from A to B is more than the time taken by it to travel from
B to A
S
(D) None of the above
O
111. In the last Question 155, if A lies to the left of B, time taken by the insect to travel from B to
A will be:
(A) 12 sec (B) 15 sec (C) 18 sec (D) 21 sec
TO
RELATIVE MOTION IN TWO DIMENSION
112. A boy is running on the plane road with velocity (v) with a long hollow tube in his hand. The
E
water is falling vertically downwards with velocity (u). At what angle to the vertical, he must
incline the tube so that the water drops enters in it without touching its side :–
v v u v

tan1   sin 1   tan1   cos1  
(A) (B) (C) (D)
u u v u
113. A man standing on a road has to hold his umbrella at 30° with the verticle to keep the rain
away. He throws the umbrella and starts running at 10 km/hr then he finds that rain drops
are hitting his head vertically, then speed of rain drops with respect to moving man :–
10
(A) 20 km/hr. (B) 10 3 km/hr.. (C) km/hr.. (D) 10 km/hr.
3
114. A river is flowing from east to west at a speed of 5m/min. A man on south bank of river,
capable of swimming 10 m/min in still water, wants to swim across the river in shortest
time; he should swim :–
(A) due north
(B) due north-east
(C) due north-east with double the speed of river
(D) none of the above
115. A boat is sailing at a velocity (3iˆ  4ˆj) with respect to ground and water in river is
A
flowing with a velocity (3iˆ  4 ˆj) . Relative velocity of the boat with respect to water is :–
(A) 8 ˆj (B) 5 2 (C) 6iˆ  8ˆj
D
116. A river is flowing at the rate of 6km/hr. A swimmer swims across with a velocity of
(D)
I
6iˆ  8 ˆj
N
9 km/hr w.r.t. water. The resultant velocity of the man will be in (km/hr) :–
(A) 117 (B) 340
S I (C) 17 (D)
117. A man wishes to swim across a river 0.5 km. wide. If he can swim at the rate of 2 km/h. in still
3 40
O
water and the river flows at the rate of 1 km/h. The angle (w.r.t. the flow of the river) along
which he should swim so as to reach a point exactly opposite his starting point, should be :–
(A) 60° (B) 120° (C) 145° (D) 90°
TO
118. A boat man can row with a speed of 10 km./hr. in still water. The river flow steadily at 5 km/
hr. and the width of the river is 2 km. If the boat man cross the river with reference to
E
minimum distance of approach then time elapsed in rowing the boat will be :–
2 3 2 3 2 5 2
(A) hour (B) hour (C) hour (D) hour
5 5 3 5 3
119. A bird is flying towards south with a velocity 40km/hr and a train is moving with a velocity
40 km/hr towards east. What is the velocity of the bird w.r.t. an obserber in train :–
(A) 40 2 km/hr. North – East (B) 40 2 km/hr. South – East
(C) 40 2 km/hr. South – West (D) 40 2 km/hr. North – West
120. A bird is flying with a speed of 40 km/hr. in the north direction. A train is moving with a
speed of 40 km/hr. in the west direction. A passenger sitting in the train will see the bird
moving with velocity :–
(A) 40 km/hr in NE direction (B) 40 2 km/hr in NE direction
(C) 40 km/hr in NW direction (D) 40 2 km/hr in NW direction
121. A particle is moving with a velocity of 10m/s towards east. After 10 s its velocity changes to
10m/s towards north. Its average accelaration is :-
2
(A) zero (B) 2 m/s towards N-W
A
1 1
I
(C) m/s2 towards N-W (D) m/s2 towards N-W
2 2
D
122. A boat covers certain distance between two spots on a river taking 't1' time, going down
stream and 't2' time going upstream, what time will be taken by the boat to cover the same
distance in still water :–
(A)
t1  t 2
2
(B)
t1 3
 t
2 4 2
I
2t1t 2
(C) t  t
1 2
N (D)
t1  t 2
2t1t 2
(A) 13 km/hr (B) 7 km/hr S

123. A man is walking on a road with a velocity 3 km/hr. Suddenly rain starts falling. The velocity of rain is
10 km/hr in vertically downward direction. the relative velocity of the rain with respect to man is :–
O (C) 109 km/hr (D) 13 km/hr
(A)
TO
124. Rain drops are falling with velocity (2iˆ  4 ˆj)m / s . What should be the velocity of man so
rain drops hit him with speed 5 m/s.
 î (B) 5iˆ (C) 2iˆ (D) Both (A) & (B)
E
125. Two particles separated at a horizontal distance x as shown in fig. they projected at the
same line as shown in fig. with different initial speeds. The time after which the horizontal
distance between them become zero:
u
3 u
30° 60°
x
(A) x/u (B) u/2x (C) 2u/x (D) None of these
KINEMATICS
EXERCISE-1
1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (D) 5. (C) 6. (C) 7. (B) 8. (C) 9. (C)
10. (B) 11. (B) 12. (B) 13. (B) 14. (A) 15. (A) 16. (D) 17. (D) 18. (D)
19. (A) 20. (C) 21. (C) 22. (C) 23. (B) 24. (B) 25. (D) 26. (D) 27. (A)
28. (A) 29. (B) 30. (B) 31. (D) 32. (B) 33. (C) 34. (D) 35. (A) 36. (D)
37. (A) 38. (C) 39. (B) 40. (B) 41. (D) 42. (B) 43. (B) 44. (C) 45. (B)
A
46. (A) 47. (C) 48. (B) 49. (C) 50. (A) 51. (A) 52. (D) 53. (D) 54. (C)
I
55. (B) 56. (C) 57. (D) 58. (D) 59. (D) 60. (D) 61. (A) 62. (B) 63. (C)
64. (D) 65. (B) 66. (C) 67. (A) 68. (C) 69. (B) 70. (C) 71. (B) 72. (B)
D
73. (B) 74. (D) 75. (A) 76. (D) 77. (C) 78. (C) 79. (C) 80. (C) 81. (C)
82. (B) 83. (D) 84. (A) 85. (C) 86. (B) 87. (B) 88. (D) 89. (B) 90. (B)
91. (B)
100. (A)
92. (D)
101. (D)
93. (C)
102. (D)
94. (A)
103. (A)
95. (C)
I
104. (C)
96. (D)
105. (A)
N 97. (C)
106. (B)
98. (D)
107. (C)
99. (B)
108. (B)
S
109. (A) 110. (A) 111. (B) 112. (A) 113. (B) 114. (A) 115. (C) 116. (A) 117. (B)
118. (B) 119. (C) 120. (B) 121. (B) 122. (C) 123. (C) 124. (D) 125. (A)
O O
E T
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
NEWTON
LAW’S OF MOTION
ETOOSINDIA
NEWTON LAW'S OF MOTION
EXERCISE–I
1. Two masses of 5 kg and 10 kg are connected to a pulley as shown. What will be the
acceleration if the pulley is set free : (g = acceleration due to gravity)
I A
2.
(A) g (B) g/2 (C) g/3
N D (D) g/4
A cylinder of mass 10 kg is rolling in a plane with an initial velocity of 10m/s. If the
I
coefficient of friction between the surface and the cylinder is 0.5, the before stopping,
it will travelled the distance (g = 10m/s2)
(A) 10 m (B) 7.5 m (C) 5 m (D) 2.5 m
3.
S
On the horizontal surface of a truck a block of mass 1 kg. is placed ( = 0.6) and truck
O
is moving with acceleration 5 m/s2 then the frictional force on block will be :–
(A) 5N (B) 6N (C) 5.88N (D) 8N
O
4. A body of mass 2 kg is being dragged with uniform velocity of 2 m/s on a rough horizontal
plane. The coefficient of friction between body and the surface is 0.2. The amount of
T
heat generated in 5 second will be [J =4.2J/cal and g = 9.8 m/s2]
(A) 9.33 cal (B) 8.33 cal (C) 7.33 cal (D) 6.33 cal
5.
6.
E
A car is moving on a circular path and takes a turn. If R1 and R2 be the reactions on the
inner and outer wheels respectively then :–
(A) R1 < R2 (B) R1 = R2 (C) R1 R2 (D) R1 > R2
A motorcycle is travelling on a curved track of radius 500 m if the coefficient of friction

between road and tyres is 0.5. The speed avoiding skidding, will be :–
(A) 50 m/s (B) 75 m/s (C) 25 m/s (D) 35 m/s
7. n bullet strikes per second elastically on wall and rebound then what will be the force
exerted on the wall by bullets if mass of each bullet is m :-
mnv
(A) mnv (B) 4mnv (C) 2mnv (D)
2
8. A monkey of mass 20 kg. is holding a vertical rope. The rope will not break when a mass
of 25 kg. is suspended from it but will break if the mass exceeds 25 kg. What is the
maximum acceleration it which the monkey can climb up along the rope ?
(g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 5 m/s2 (B) 10 m/s2 (C) 25 m/s2 (D) 2.5 m/s2
9. A man weighs 80 kg. He stands on a weighing scale in a lift which is moving upwards
with a uniform acceleration of 5m/s2 . What would be the reading on the scale ?
(g = 10 m/s2)
(A) Zero (B) 400N (C) 800N (D)1200N
A
10. A block of mass m is placed on a smooth wedge of inclination . The whole system is
11.
accelerated horizontally so that the block does not slip on the wedge. The force exerted
by the wedge on the block (g is acceleration due to gravity) will be :–
(A) mg sin (B) mg (C) mg/cos
D
(D) mg cos
The coefficient of static friction, s, between block A of mass 2 kg. and the table as
I
N
shown in the figure is 0.2. What would be the maximum mass value of block B so that
I
the two blocks do not move ? The string and the pulley are assumed to be smooth and
massless. (g = 10 m/s2)
O S
O
(A) 4.0 kg. (B) 0.2 kg. (C) 0.4 kg. (D) 2.0 kg.
T
12. A cyclist on the ground goes round a circular path of circumference 34.3 m in 22
second. The angle made by him, with the vertical, will be :–
E
(A) 45° (B) 40° (C) 42° (D) 48°
13. In the figure given below, the position–time graph X(m)

of a particle of mass 0·1 kg is shown. The impulse 6
at t=2 sec is – 4
(A) 0·2 kgms–1 2
(B) –0·2 kgms–1
(C) 0·1 kgms–1 O 2 4 6
(D) –0·4 kgms–1 t(seconds)
14. A person is standing in an elevator. In which situation he finds his weight less :–
(A) when the elevator moves upward with constant acceleration
(B) when the elevator moves downward with constant acceleration
(C) when the elevator moves upward with uniform velocity
(D) when the elevator moves downward with uniform velocity
15. Two weights w1 and w2 are connected by a light thread which passes over a light
smooth pulley. If the pulley is raised upwards with an acceleration equal to g, then the
tension in the thread will be
2w1w 2 w1w 2 4w1w 2 4w1w 2
(A) w  w (B) w  w (C) w  w (D) w  w
A
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
16. A 0.5 kg ball moving with a speed of 12 m/s strikes a hard wall at an
angle of 30° with the wall. It is reflected with the same speed and at
the same angle. If the ball is in contact with the wall for 0.25 seconds,
the average force acting on the wall is :-
D I 30°
(A) 48 N
(B) 24 N
(C) 12 N
I N
S
30°
(D) 96 N
O
17. A person used force (F), shown in figure to move a load with constant velocity on given
surface. Identify the correct surface profile :-
TO F
O
L
X
E
(A) (B) (C)
18. The ratio of gravitational mass to inertial mass is equal to :

(D)
1
(A) (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) None of these
2
19. A man weighs 80 kg, he stands on a weighing scale in a lift which is moving upwards with
a uniform acceleration of 5 m/s2. What would be the reading on the scale? (g = 10 m/s2)
(1) 800 N (2) 1200 N (3) Zero (4) 400 N
20. A given object takes n times as much time to slide down a 450 rough incline as it takes to
slide down a perfectly smooth 450 incline. The coefficeint of kinetic friction between the
object and the incline is given by :
 1  1   1  1 
(A)  1  2  (B)  2  (C)  1 2  (D)  
 n   1 n   n   1  n2 
21. Three solids of mass m1, m2 and m3 are connected with weight less string in succession
and are placed on a frictionless table. If the mass m3 is dragged with a force T. The tension
in the string between m2 and m3 is :-
A
m2 m3 m1  m2 m2  m3
(A) m  m  m T (B) m  m  m T (C) m  m  m T (D) m  m  m T
I
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
22. Two blocks of masses M1 = 4 kg and M2 = 6 kg are connected by a string of negligible
D
mass passing over a frictionless pulley as shown in the figure below. The coefficient of
friction betwen the block M1 and the horizontal surfcae is 0.4. When the system is released,
N
the masses M1 and M2 start accelerating. What additional mass m should be placed over
I
M1 so that the masses (M1 + m) slide with a uniform speed?
m
S
M1
M2
O O
(1) 12 kg (2) 11 kg (3) 10 kg
23. A man of mass 90 kg is standing in an elevator whose cable broke suddenly. If the elevator
falls, apparent weight of the man is :
(2) kg
(A) 90N
E T
(A) 10 2 kg
(B) 90g N

(C) 0 N (D) any negative value
24. A body, under the action of a force F  6iˆ  8 ˆj  10kˆ , acquires an acceleration of
1m/s2. The mass of this body must be :-
(B) 2 10 kg (C) 10 kg (D) 20 kg
25. A block of mass m is in contact with the cart C as shown in the figure. The coefficient
of static friction between the block and the cart is µ. The acceleration  of the cart that
will prevent the block from falling statisfies :-
g mg 
(A)  < (B)  >
 
C m
g g
(C)  > (D) 
m 
26. A gramophone record is revolving with an angular velocity . A coin is placed at a distance
r from the centre of the record. The static coefficient of friction is µ. The coin will revolve
with the record if :-
g 2 g
(A) r  (B) r  g 2
(C) r  (D) r 
2 g 2
ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
I
13
A
EXERCISE - I
14 15
D
An s . 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 4 3 3 1 2 2 3
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
An s . 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 3 1 4 4
I N
O S
TO
E
EXERCISE-II
1. A particle is in straight line motion with uniform velocity. A force is not required :-
(A) To increase the speed (B) To decrease the speed
(C) To keep the same speed (D) To change the direction
2. Essential characteristic of equilibrium is :-

(A) Momentum equals zero (B) Acceleration equals zero
(C) K.E. equals zero (D) Velocity equals zero
3. When a constant force is applied to a body, it moves with uniform :-
A
(A) Acceleration (B) Velocity (C) Speed (D) Momentum
4.
5.
A 5 kg. mass is accelerated from rest to 60 m/s in 1 sec. What force acts on it : -
(A) 5  60 N (B) (5/60)  981 N (C) 602  52 N (D) (5/2)  602 × 981N
D I
A body of mass 40 g is moving with a constant velocity 2 cm/s on a horizontal frictionless
N
table. The force on the body in dynes is :-
I
(A) Zero (B) 39200 (C) 160 (D) 80
S
6. A body of mass 2 kg moving on a horizontal surface with an initial velocity of 4 m/s
comes to rest after 2 sec. If one wants to keep this body moving on the same surface
with a velocity of 4 m/s, the force required is :-
O
(A) 8 N (B) 4 N (C) Zero (D) 2 N
7. Gravel is dropped into a conveyer belt at a rate of 0.5 kg/s. The extra force required in
O
newton to keep the belt moving at 2 m/s is :-
(A) 1 N (B) 2 N (C) 4 N (D) 0.5 N
8.
9.
E T
A block of metal weighing 2kg is resting on a frictionless plane. It is struck by a jet
releasing water at a rate of 1 kg/s and at a speed of 5 m/s. The initial acceleration of
the block will be :-
(A) 2.5 m/s2 (B) 5 m/s2 (C) 10 m/s2 (D) 5 m/s2
Two blocks of masses 2 kg and 1 kg are in contact with each other on a frictionless
table. When a horizontal force of 3.0 N is applied to the block of mass 2 kg the value of
the force of contact between the two blocks is -
(A) 4 N (B) 3N (C) 5N (D) 1N
10. Two persons are holding a rope of negligible weight tightly at its ends so that it is horizontal.
A 15 kg weight is attached to the rope at the mid point which now no longer remains
horizontal. The minimum tension required to completely straighten the top is
(A) 15 kg (B) 15/2 kg (C) 5 kg (D) Infinitely large
11. A boy of mass 40 kg is hanging from the horizontal branch of a tree. The tension in his
arms is minimum when the angle between the arms is :-
(A) 0° (B) 90° (C) 120° (D) 180°
12. A chain of mass M and length L held vertical by fixing its upper end to a rigid support.
The tension in the chain at a distance y from the rigid support is
A
(A) Mg (B) Mg(L - y)/L (C) MgL(L - y) (D) Mgy/4
13. Find the tension T2 in the system shown in fig.
T1
1kg
D I
N
T2
I
2kg
T3
3kg
(A) 1g N
O
(B) 2g N
S (C) 5g N
14. Three blocks are connected as shown in fig. on a horizontal frictionless table if m1 = 1
kg, m2 = 8 kg, m3 = 27 kg and T3 = 36N, T2 will be :-
(D) 6g N
O
T1 T2 M3 T3
M1 M2
E T
(A) 18 N (B) 9 N (C) 3.375 N
15. In the fig. given below masses m and m' are tied with a thread passing over a pulley, m'
(D) 1.75 N
is on a frictionless horizontal surface. If acceleration due to gravity is g, the acceleration

of m' in this arrangement will be :-
m'
(A) g (B) m'g/(m + m') (C) mg/m' (D) mg/(m - m')
16. Two bodies of masses 5 kg and 4 kg are arranged in two position as shown in fig. (A) and
(B), if the pulleys and the table are perfectly smooth, the acceleration of the 5 kg, body in
case (A) and (B) are :-
5 kg
(A) (B)
4kg 4kg
5kg
(A) g and (5/9) g (B) (4/9)g and (1/9)g (C) g/5 and g/5
I A
(D) (5/9)g aned (1/9)g
D
17. Three equal weights of mass 2 kg each are hanging on a string passing over a fixed
pulley as shown in fig. What is the tension in the string connecting weights B and C.
I N
O A S B
O
C
E T
(A) Zero (B) 13.3 N (C) 3.3 N
18. Two blocks each of mass M are resting on a frictionless inclined plane as shown in fig.
then
(D) 19.6 N
M
M
B
A
60° 30°
(A) The block A moves down the plane (B) The block B moves down the plane
(C) Both the blocks remains at rest (D) Both the blocks moves down the plane.
19. A small sphere is suspended by a string from the ceiling of a car. If the car begins to move
with a constant acceleration a, the inclination of the string to the vertical is :-
(A) tan-1 (a/g) in the direction of motion
(B) tan-1 (a/g) opposite to the direction of motion
(C) tan-1(g/a) in the direction of motion
(D) tan-1 (g/a) opposite to the direction of motion
20. A pendulum is suspended from the roof of a rail road car. When the car is moving on a
circular track the pandulum inclines :
(A) Forward (B) Backward
(C) Towards the centre of the path (D) Away from the centre of the path
21. Drums of oil are carried in a truck. If a constant acceleration is applied on the truck, the
surface of the oil in the drum will -
I A
D
(A) Remain unaffected (B) Rise towards forward direction
(C) Rise towards backward direction (D) Nothing is certain
N
22. A boy sitting on the top most berth in the compartment of a train which is just going to
I
stop on a railway station, drops an apple aiming at the open hand of his brother situated
vertically below his hands at a distance of about 2m. The apple will fall :-
S
(A) In the hand of his brother
(B) Slightly away from the hands of his brother in the direction of motion of the train
(C) Slightly away from the hands of his brother in the direction opposite to the direction
O
of motion of the train
O
23. A ball weighing 10 g hits a hard surface vertically with a speed of 5 m/s and rebounds
with the same speed. The ball remains in contact with the surface for (0.01) sec. The
T
average force exerted by the surface on the ball is :-
(A) 100 N (B) 10 N (C) 1 N (D) 0.1 N
E
24. A force-time graph for the motion of a body is shown in fig. Change in linear momentum
between 0 and 8 s is :-
+2
0 2 6 8
F
4
–2 t(in s)
(A) Zero (B) 4 N-s (C) 8 Ns (D) None
25. Newton's II law of motion connects :

(A) Momentum and acceleration
(B) Change of momentum and velocity
(C) Rate of change of momentum and external force
(D) Rate of change of force and momentum
26. The distance x covered in time t by a body having initial velocity v0 and having a constant
 1
acceleration a is given by x = v0t +   at2 . This result follows from :-
2
(A) Newton's first law (B) Newton's second law
A
(C) Newton's third law (D) None of these three
27. Working of rocket or jet is based on :-

(A) Newton's law (B) Newton's II law
D I
(C) Newton's III law (D) All the three laws
28. When a horse pulls a wagon, the force that causes the horse to move forward is the
N
force
I
(A) He exerts on the wagon (B) The wagon exerts on him
(C) The ground exerts on him (D) He exerts on the ground
the shore by making use of Newton's :-
O
(A) First law
(C) Third law
S
29. A man is at rest in the middle of a pond on perfectly smooth ice. He can get himself to
(B) Second law

(D) Law of gravitation
(A) Zero
O
30. A material body A of mass m1 exerts a force on another material body of mass m2. If
the acc. be a2, the magnitude of the acc. of A is :-
T
(B) m2a2/m1 (C) m1a2/m2 (D) a2
E
31. There are three Newton's laws of motion namely I, II and III ; we can derive : -
(A) II and III law from the I law (B) III and I law from the II law
(C) I and II law from the III law
(D) All the laws are independent of each other
32. If the force of gravity suddenly disappears :-

(A) The mass of all bodies will become zero
(B) The weight of all bodies will become zero
(C) Both mass and weight of all bodies will become zero
(D) Neither mass nor weight of all bodies will become zero
33. Two bodies of masses 4 kg and 5 kg are acted upon by the same force. If the acceleration
of lighter body is 2m/sec2, then the acceleration of the heavier body is :-
(A) 4.2 m/s2 (B) 3.6 m/s2 (C) 2.4 m/s2 (D) 1.6 m/s2
34. A jet water, whose cross section is 'a' strikes a wall making an angle '' with normal and
elastically rebounds. The velocity of water of density 'd' is v. Force exerted on wall is :-
v


v
(A) 2 av2 d cos  (B) 2 av2 d sin 
A
(C) 2 av d cos  (D) av d cos 
35. Action and reaction :- (For a given system)

(i) Act on the two different objects
(iii) Have equal magnitudes
(A) i, ii, iii
(ii) Have opposite directions
(iv) Have zero resultant
(B) ii, iii, iv
D I
N
(C) All of the above (D) None of the above
stone it happens :-
(A) Inertia (B) Velocity (C) Reaction
S I
36. When we kick a stone, we get hurt. Due to which one of the following properties of
(D) Momentum
O
37. Ten one rupees coins are put on top of each other on a table. Each coin has a mass 'm'
kg., then the force on the 7th coin (counted from the bottom) due to all the coins on its top :-
(A) 3 mg (B) 7 mg (C) 2 mg (D) 5 mg
TO
38. A mass of 6 kg is suspended by a rope of length 2m from a celling. A force of 50 N is
applied in horizontal direction at the mid point of the rope. What is the angle of the rope
with the verticle in equilibrium :-
E T1 
1m
P
1m T2 50N
w=60N
4 5 5

(A) tan–1   (B) tan–1   (C) tan–1   (D) None
5 4 6
39. The force exerted by the person on the floor of the elevator is more than the weight of the
person if the elevator is :-
(i) Going up and slowing down (ii) Going up and speeding up
(iii) Going down and slowing down (iv) Going down and speeding up
(A) i, iii (B) ii, iii (C) i, iv (D) ii, iv
40. A lift of mass 100 kg starts moving from rests in the upward direction. Fig. shows the
variation if speed of the lift T1, T2 and T3 stand for tension in the rope form zero to two
seconds, two to six seconds, six to seven seconds respectively then :-
I A
Velocity(m/sec)
D
4
0 2
I 6
N
7 t(sec)
(A) T1 : T2 : T3 :: 1 : 1 : 1
O
(C) T1 : T2 : T3 :: 3 : 5 : 6
S
(B) T1 : T2 : T3 :: 6 : 5 : 3
(D) T1 : T2 : T3 :: 6 : 5 : 6
41. Two blocks each having a mass M are placed as shown in the figure. The acceleration of
O
the system is :-
T
a
E M

gsin 
M
(A) 0 (B) (C) g sin (D) 2g sin

2
42. Two blocks of masses 2.9 kg. and 1.9 kg. are suspended from a rigid supports by two
inextensible wires each of length, 1m. the upper wire has negligible mass and the lower
wire has a uniform mass of 0.2 kg./m. the whole system of block, wire and support have an
upward acceleration of 0.2 m/s2 (g = 9.8 m/s2). The tension at the mid-point of lower wire
is
S
A
2.9 kg
B
1.9 kg
(A) 10N (B) 20N (C) 30N (D) 50N
43. The pulleys and strings shown in the fig. are smooth and of negligible mass. For the
system to remain in equilibrium, the angle  should be
I A

N D
I
2m
S
m m
(A) 0° (B) 30° (C) 45° (D) 60°
O
44. A metal sphere is hung by a string fixed to a wall. The forces acting
O
on the sphere are shown are fig. Which of the following statement is
correct :-
  
 T
T
(a) R  T  W  0 (b) T2 = R2 + W 2
(c) T = R + W (d) R = W tan  R
E
(A) a, b, c (B) b, c, d
(C) a, b, d (D) a, b, c, d
W
45. An object with a mass 10 kg moves at a constant velocity of 10 m/s. A constant force
then acts for 4 seconds on the object and gives it a speed of 2 m/s in opposite direction.
The acceleration produced is :-
(A) 3 m/s2 (B) –3 m/s2 (C) 0.3 m/s2 (D) –0.3 m/s2
46. The ratio of weight of a man in a stationary lift and in a lift accelerating downwards with
a uniform acceleration is 3 : 2. The acceleration of the lift is:-
g g 4
(A) (B) (C) g (D) g
3 2 3
47. A body of mass 40 grams is moving with a constant velocity 2 cm/s on a horizontal frictionless
table. The force on the table is :-
(A) 39,200 dynes (B) 160 dynes (C) 80 dynes (D) Zero dynes
48. The velocity acquired by a mass m in travelling a certain distance d starting from rest
under the actiion of a constant force is directly proportional to :-
1
(A) m (B) Independent of m (C) (D) m
m
49. A cork and a metal bob are connected by a string as shown in the figure. If the beaker is
given an acceleration towards left then the cork will be thrown towards :-
(A) Right
(B) Left
(C) Upwards
I A
D
(D) Downward
50. A body kept on a smooth inclined plane of inclination 1 in x will remain stationary relative to
the inclined plane if the plane is given a horizontal acceleration equal to :-
(A) 2
x  1g (B)
x2  1
x
g
I (C)
gx
2
x 1
N (D) 2
g
x 1
(1) g
O (2)
2
S
51. A pulley is attached to the ceiling of a lift moing upwards. Two particles are attached to
the two ends of a string passing over the pulley. The masses of the particles are in the
ratio 2 : 1. If the acceleration of the particles is g/2, then the acceleration of the lift will be
g
(3)
g
3
(4)
g
4
O
52. Two masses of 1 kg and 5 kg are attached to the ends of a massless string passing over
a pulley of negligible weight. The pulley itself is attached to a light spring balance as shown
T
in figure. The masses start moving during this interval; the reading of spring balance will
be:-
E
1kg
5kg
(A) More than 6 kg. (B) Less than 6 kg. (C) Equal to 6 kg. (D) None of the above
53. A player catches a ball of 200 gm moving with a speed of 20 m/s. If the time taken to
complete the catch is 0.5 s, the force exerted on the player's hand is :-
(A) 8N (B) 4N (C) 2N (D) 0N
54. A frame will be inertial, if it moves with respect to another inertial frame with a constant :-
(A) Linear velocity (B) Angular velocity
(C) Linear acceleration (D) All of the above
55. Two masses of 10 kg and 20 kg respectively are connected by a massless spring as

shown in the figure. A force of 200 N acts on the 20 kg mass. At the instant shown the
10 kg mass has acceleration 12 m/s2. What is the acceleration of 20 kg mass :-
10 kg
20 kg
200 kg
I A
(A) Zero (B) 10 m/s2 (C) 4 m/s2
N D (D) 12 m/s2
S I
56. The pulley arrangements shown in the figure are identical, the mass of the rope being
negligible. In case (a) mass m is lifted by attaching a mass of 2m to the other end of
the rope. In case (b) the mass m is lifted by pulling the other end of the rope with a
constant downward force F = 2mg, where g is the acceleration due to gravity. The
acceleration of mass m in case (a) is :-
O O
E T
(A) Zero
m 2m
(a)
m
F=2mg
(b)
(B) More than that in case (b)
(C) Less than that in case (b) (D) Equal to that in case (b)
57. What is the mechanical advantage of single fixed pulley :-
P
w
A
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 0.5 (D) 4
58. A test tube is filled with water and end closed. It contains a small steel ball and an air
bubble. The test tube is rotated in a horizontal circle, with the help of a string (see fig.)
then :-
bubble
D I
I N
ball
(A) Both, steel ball and air bubble move outwards
(B) Both, steel ball and air bubble move inwards
O S
(C) Steel ball moves outwards and air bubble moves inwards
(D) Steel ball moves inwards and air bubble moves outwards
TO
59. Three masses of 1 kg, 6 kg and 3 kg are connected to each other with threads and are
placed on a table as shown in figure. What is the acceleration with which the system
is moving ? Take g = 10 ms–2 :
T2
E
T1
6kg
T1
1kg 3kg
(A) Zero (B) 2 ms–2 (C) 4 ms–2 (D) 3 ms–2
60. A balloon of mass M is descending at a constant acceleration . When a mass m is

released from the balloon it starts rising with the same acceleration . (Assuming that
its volume does not change), what is the value of m :-
 2 g g
(A) M (B) M (C) M (D) M
g g  2
61. The surface are frictionless, the ratio of T1 and T2 is :-

F
T2 T1
3kg 15kg 30°
12kg
(A)
3 :1 (B) 1 : 3 (C) 1 : 5 (D) 5 : 1
62. The elevator shown in figure is descending, with an acceleration
of 2 ms–2. The mass of the block A is 0.5 kg. The force exerted
by the block A on the block B is :
(A) 2 N
2m/s–2
A
(B) 4 N
I
(C) 6 N A
(D) 8 N B
D
63. Two blocks of masses 6 kg and 4 kg are connected by a rope of mass 2 kg are resting
on a frictionless floor as shown in the following figure :
N
C B A
4kg 6kg F=60N
I
2kg
If a constant force of 60 N is applied to 6 kg block, then the tension in the rope at points A,
S
B and C are respectively given by :
(A) 60 N, 60 N, 60 N (B) 30 N, 25 N, 20 N
(C) 20 N, 25 N, 30 N (D) 20 N, 20 N, 20 N
(A) 2.8 N
O O
64. A block of mass 2kg is placed on the floor. The coefficient of static friction is 0.4. Force of
2.8N is applied on the block. The force of friction between the block and the floor is
(B) 8 N (C) 2.0 N (D) zero
E T
65. All surfaces assumed to be frictionless calculate the horizontal force F that must be applied
so that m1 and m2 do not move relative to m3 is :–
m1
m3 m2
F
m2 g m2 g
(A) (m1 + m2 + m3) m (B) (m1 + m2) m
1 1
m1g m1g
(C) (m2 + m3) m (D) (m1 + m3) m
2 2
66. A tennis ball is dropped on the floor from a height of 20 m. It rebounds to a height of 5 m. If
the ball was in contact with the floor for 0.01 s. What was its average acceleration during
contanct ? (g=10m/s2)
(A) 3000 m/s2 (B) 2000 m/s2 (C) 1000 m/s2 (D) 500 m/s2
67. The frictional force of the air on the body of mass 0.25 kg, falling with an accleration of 9.2
m/s2, will be :
(A) 1.0 N (B) 0.55 N (C) 0.25 N (D) 0.15 N
68. A man weighing 100 kg carries a load of 10 kg on his head. He jumps from a tower
with the load on his head. What will be the weight of the load as experienced by the
A
man ?
(A) zero (B) 10 kg (C) slightly more than 10 kg (D) 110 kg
D
69. Two masses of 10 kg and 5 kg are suspended from a fixed support as shown in figure. The
system is pulled down with a force of 150 N attached to the lower mass. The string at-
tached to the support breaks and the system accelerates downwards. If the downwards
I
N
force continues to act, what is the acceleration of the system
S I10 kg
O O 150 N
5 kg
E T
(A) 20 m/s2 (B) 10 m/s2 (C) 5 m/s2
70. A ship of mass 3 × 107 kg initially at rest is pulled by a force of 5 × 104 N through a
distance of 3m. Negelcting friction, the speed of the ship at this moment is :
(A) 3.0 m/s (B) 1.5 m/s (C) 0.1 m/s (D) 2 m/s
(D) zero
71. A 150 g ball, moving horizontally at 20 m/s was hit straight back to bowler at 12 m/s. If
contact with bat lasted for 0.04 sec, then average force exerted by the bat on the ball is
:-
(A) 100 N (B) 120 N (C) 150 N (D) 200 N
72. A disc of mass 1·0 kg kept floating horizontally in air by firing bullets of mass 0·05 kg each
vertically at it, at the rate of 10 per second. If the bullets rebound with the same speed, the
speed with which these are fired will be–
v
m
A
mg
(A) 0·098 m/s (B) 0·98 m/s (C) 9·8 m/s
D
73. A block of mass 15 kg is placed on a long trolley. The cofficient of friction between the
block and trolley is 0.18. The trolley accelerates from rest with
I
(D) 98·0 m/s
0.5 m/s 2 for 20 s. then what is the friction force:-

(A) 3.5 N (B) 133.3 N (C) 7.5 N
I N
(D) N.O.T.
S
74. A rope lies on a table such that a part of it hangs down the table, when the length of
hanging part is 1/3 of entire length the rope just begins to slide. The cofficient of friction
between the rope and the table is :-
(A) 2/3
O O (B) 1/2 (C) 1/3 (D) 1/6
75. A 2 kg block (A) is placed on 8 kg block (B) which rest on the table. Cofficient of the friction
between (A) and (B) is 0.2 and between (B) and table is 0.5. A 25 N horizontal force is
T
applied on the block (B), than the friction force between the block (A) and (B) is :-
(1) Zero (2) 3.9 N (3) 5 N (4) 49 N
E
76. Two block (A) 2 kg and (B) 5 kg rest one over the other on a smooth horizontal plane. The
cofficient of static and dynamic friction between (A) and (B) is the same and equal to 0.60.
The maximum horizontal force that can be applied to (B) in order that both (A) and (B) do
not have any relative motion :
=0.60
A 2kg
F B 5kg
(A) 42 N (B) 42 kgf (C) 5.4 kgf (D) 1.2 N
77. A body is placed on an inclined place and has to be pushed down. The angle made by the
normal reaction with the vertical will be :-
(A) Equal to angle of repose (B) Equal to the angle of friction
(C) Less than the angle of repose (D) More than the angle of friction
78. A car is moving along a straight horizontal road with a speed V0. If the coefficient of friction
between tyres and the road is . The shortest distance in which the car can be stopped is:
2 2 2 2
V0 V0  V0  2V0
(A) (B) (C)   (D)
2 g g  g g
79. Three forces P, Q & R are acting at a point in a plane. The angle between P and Q, Q
and R are 150 o and 120o respectively. Then for equilibrium, forces P, Q & R are in the
ratio :
I A
D
(A) 1 : 2 : 3 (B) 1 : 2 : 3 (C) 3 : 2 : 1 (D) 31/2 : 2 : 1
N
80. The rear side of a truck is open and a box of mass 20 kg is placed on the truck 4m away
I
from the open end,  = 0.15 and g=10 m/s2. The truck starts from rest with an acceleration
of 2m/s2 on a straight road. The box will fall off the truck when it is at a distance from the
S
starting point equal to.
(A) 4 m (B) 8 m (C) 16 m (D) 32 m
O
81. The force required to just move a body up the inclined plane is double the force re-
quired to just prevent the body from sliding down the plane. The coefficient of friction is
. The inclination  of the plane is :-
TO
(A) tan–1  (B) tan–1 (/2) (C) tan–1 (2) (D) tan–1 (3)
82. A block of mass 0.1 kg. is pressed against a wall with a horizontal force of 5N as
shown in the figure. If the coefficient of friction between the wall and the block is 0.5
E
then the frictional force acting on the block in Newton will be (take g = 9.8 m/s2) :-
Fs
R 5 Newtons
mg
(A) 9.8 (B) 2.5 (C) 0.98 (D) 0.49
83. A block slips with constant velocity on a plane inclined at an angle . The same block is
pushed up the plane with an initial velocity v0. The distance covered by the block before
coming to rest is :-
v 02 v 20 v 20 sin2  v 20 sin2 
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2gsin  4gsin 2g 4g
84. A block of mass m is lying on an inclined plane. The coefficient of friction between the
plane and the block is µ. The force (F1) required to move the block up the inclined plane
will be:-
(A) mg sin + µmg cos (B) mg cos – µmg sin
A
(C) mg sin – µmg cos (D) mg cos + µmg sin
85. A body is sliding down an inclined plane (angle of inclination 45°). If the coefficient of
(A)
4.9
(B) 4.9 2 (C) 19.6 2
D
friction is 0.5 and g = 9.8 m/s2. then the acceleration of the body downwards in m/s2 is :-
(D) 4.9
I
N
2
S I
86. A block of mass m lying on a rough horizontal plane is acted upon by a horizontal force P
and another force Q inclined at an angle  to the vertical. The block will remain in equilib-
rium if the coefficient of friction between it and the surface is :-
O
Q 
(A)
TO P  Q sin 
mg  Qcos 
(B)
P cos   Q
mg  Q sin 
(C)
P  Qcos 
mg  Qsin 
(D)
P sin   Q
mg  Qcos 
E
87. The system shown in the figure is in equilibrium. The maximum value of W, so that the
maximum value of static frictional force on 100 kg. body is 450 N, will be :-
100kg
45°
(A) 100 N (B) 250 N (C) 450 N (D) 1000 N
88. Adjoining figure shows two blocks A and B pushed against the wall with the force F. The
wall is smooth but the surfaces in contact of A and B are rough. Which of the following is
true for the system of blocks to be at rest against the wall :
(A) F should be be more than the weight of A and B
(B) F should be equal to the weight of A and B A B
F
(C) F should be less than the weight of A and B
(D) system cannot be in equilibrium wall
89. A block of mass M is pulled along a horizontal frictionless surface by a rope of mass m. If
a force F is applied at one end of the rope, the force which the rope exerts on the block is
:-
(A) F/(M + m) (B) F (C) FM/(m + M) (D) Zero
90. A satellite in force free space sweeps stationary interplanetary dust at a rate (dM/dt) =+
I A
D
v. The acceleration of satellite of mass M is :-
(A) - 2 v2/M (B) - 2 v2/M (C) - v2/M (D) - v2
Then A and B will read respectively.

(A) 4 kg and zero kg (B) zero kg and 4 kg (C) 4 kg and 4 kg
N
91. A block of mass 4 kg is suspended through two light spring balances A and B in series.
I (D) 2 kg and 2 kg
(A) 500t – 50t
O
2
(B) 50t – 10 (C) 50 – t
S
92. If force F = 500 – 100t, then function of impulse with time will be %
2
93. The coefficient of static friction between two surfaces depend on

9
(D) 100t2
O
(A) nature of surface
(B) the shape of the surface in contact
T
(C) the area of contact
(D) all of the above
E
94. For a6 Rocket propulsion velocity of exhaust gases relative to rocket is 2 km/s. If mass
of rocket system is 1000 kg, then the rate of fuel consumption for a rocket to rise up
with acceleration6 4.9 m/s2 will be
(A) 12.25 kg/s (B) 17.5 kg/s (C) 7.35 kg/s (D) 5.2 kg/s
95. If the force on a rocket moving with a velocity of 300 m/sec is 210 N, then the rate of
combustion of the fuel, is :-
(A) 0.7 kg/s (B) 1.4 kg/s (C) 2.7 kg/s (D) 10.7 kg/s
96. In the fig. mass M = 10 gm. is placed on an inclined plane. In order to keep it at rest, the
value of mass m will be:
m
M
30°
(A) 5 g (B) 10 3 g (C) 0.10 g (D) 3 g
97. A machine gun fires bullets of 50 gm at the speed of 1000 m/sec. If an average force of
200 N is exerted on the gun, the maximum number of bullets fired per minute is :
I A
D
(A) 240 (B) 120 (C) 60 (D) 30
98. The mechanical advantage of a wheel axle is 5 what will be theforce required to lift a
N
200 kg wt?
I
(A) 10 kg wt. (B) 2 kg wt. (C) 20 kg wt. (D) 40 kg wt.
S
99. A body of mass 100g is sliding on a inclined plane with an inclination of 600. What is the
fricitional force experienced, if coefficient of friction is 1.7 ? (Take g = 10m/s2)
(A)0.85 N (B) 0.95 N (C) 1.05 N (D) 1.145 N
O
100. As shown in figure a monkey of 20 g mass is holding a light rope that passes over a
frictionles pulley. A bunch of bananas of the same mass is tied to the other end of rope.
O
E T
Inorder to get access to the bunch the monkey starts climbing the rope. The distance
between the monkey and the bananas is
(A) Decreasing (B) Increasing
(C) Unchanged (D) Nothing can be stated
101. If the parrot starts flying upwards with an acceleration in an air tight cage, then the boy will
feel the weight of the cage:
(A) Unchanged (B) Reduced
(C) Increased (D) Nothing can be said
102. Two bodies A (30 Kg) and B (50 Kg) tied with a light string are placed on a friction less
table.A force F acting at B pulls this system with an acceleration of 2ms-2. The tension
in the string is :
(A) 60 N (B) 100 N (C) 35 N (D) 140 N
103. Weight is defined as :-
A
(A) Force of attraction by the earth (B) Mass of a body
(C) Nature of the body (D) None of these
D
104. A string of length L and mass M is lying on a horizontal table. A force F is applied at one of
its ends. Tension in the string at a distance x from the end at which force is applied is
(A) Zero (B) F (C) F(L - x)/L (D) F(L - x)/M
I
I N
105. A man is standing at a spring platform. Reading of spring balance is 60 kg wt. If man jumps
outside platform. Then reading of spring balance :-
S
(A) First increases then decreases to zero (B) Decrease
(C) Increase (D) Remains same
O
106. A rocket of mass 120 kg. is fired in the gravity free space is ejected gases with velocity
600 m/s at the rate of 1 kg/s. What will be the initial acceleration of the rocket :-
(A) 1 m/s2 (B) 5m/s2 (C) 10m/s2 (D) 15m/s2
TO
107. If 100N force is applied to 10 kg. block as shown in diagram then acceleration pro-
duced for slab-
E 100N
Slab
10 kg.
40 kg.
s=0.6
k=0.4
Smooth
(A) 1.65 m/s2 (B) 0.98 m/s2 (C) 1.2 m/s2 (D) 0.25 m/s2
108. If a ladder is not in balance against a smooth vertical wall, then it can be made in
balance by :-
(A) Decreasing the length of ladder (B) Increasing the length of ladder
(C) Increasing the angle of inclination (D) Decreasing the angle of inclination
109. A block is dragged on a smooth plane with the help of a rope which moves with a velocity
v as shown in figure. The horizontal velocity of the block is :
v v
(A) v (B) sin  (C) v sin (D) cos 
110. In the fig., the ends P and Q of an unstrechable string move downwards with uniform speed
V. Mass M moves upwards with speed.
I A
v A
  B
N
v
D
P
S
M I Q
O
(A) V cos  (B) V / cos  (C) 2V cos  (D) 2/V cos 
111. Keeping the banking angle of the road constant, the maximum safe speed of passing
O
vehicles is to be increased by 10%. The radius of curvature of the road will have to be
changed from 20 m. to :–
T
(A) 16m (B) 18m (C) 24.20 m (D) 30.5 m
E
112. A car moving on a horizontal road may be thrown out of the road in taking a turn :–
(A) by the gravitional force
(B) due to lack of proper centripetal force
(C) fue to rolling friction between the tyres and the Road
(D) due to reaction of the road
113. Sometimes a car overturns while turning at a curve. In such a case :–

(A) the inner wheels leave the ground first
(B) the outer wheels leave the ground first.
(C) both the inner and the outer wheels leave the ground simultaneously.
(D) either of the wheels can leave the ground first.
114. Radius of the curved road on national highway is R. Width of the road is b. The outer edge
of the road is raised by h with respect to inner edge so that a car with velocity v can pass
safely over it. The value of h is :–
v 2b v v 2R v 2b
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Rg Rgb bg R
115. A motor cyclist moving with a velocity of 72 km/hr on a flat road takes a turn on the road
at a point where the radius of curvature of the road is 20 meters. The acceleration due to
gravity is 10 m/s2. In order to avoid skidding, he must not bend with respect to the vertical
plane by an angle greater than :–
A
(A) = tan–1 (6) (B) = tan–1 (2) (C) = tan–1 (25.92) (D) = tan–1 (4)
D I
ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
I8 9
N 10 11
EXERCISE - II
12 13 14 15
S
An s . 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 4 1 2 3 2 2
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
An s . 2 2 1 2 4 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 3 2
O
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
An s . 2 2 4 1 3 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2
Que. 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
O
An s . 1 1 3 2 4 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 3 2 2
Que. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
An s . 4 2 2 1 1 1 4 1 1 3 2 3 3 2
Que.
An s .
Que.
An s .
Que.
An s .
E T
76
1
91
3
106
2
77
3
92
1
107
2
78
1
93
1
108
3
79
4
94
3
109
2
80
3
95
1
110
2
81
4
96
1
111
3
82
3
97
1
112
2
83
2
98
4
113
4
84
1
99
1
114
1
85
1
100
3
115
2
86
1
101
3
87
3
102
1
88
4
103
1
89
3
104
3
90
105
3
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
WORK POWER ENERGY
ETOOSINDIA
ETOOSINDIA
WORK POWER ENERGY N.K.C. SIR
EXERCISE–I
1. A bomb of mass m = 1 kg thrown vertically upwards with a speed u = 100 m/s explodes
into two parts after t = 5s. A fragment of mass m1 = 400 g moves downwards with a speed
v1 = 25 m/s, then speed v2 and direction of another mass m2 will be :-
(A) 40 m/s downwards (B) 40 m/s upwards
(C) 60 m/s upwards (D) 100 m/s upwards
2. A suspended simple pendulum of length  is making an angle  with the vertical. On releasing,
its velocity at lowest point will be :-
(A) 2g(1  cos ) (B) 2g sin (C) 2g(1  cos ) (D) 2g
3. A 1 kg stationary bomb is exploded in three parts having mass ratio 1 : 1 : 3. Parts having
same mass move in perpendicular directions with velocity 30 m/s, then the velocity of
bigger part will be:-
I A
(A) 10 2 m/s (B)
10
2
m/s (C) 15 2 m/s
N D (D)
15
2
m/s
4.
(A) 1.1J (B) 2.2J
S
(C) 3.3J
I
A body of mass 5 kg has momentum of 10 kg m/s. When a force of 0.2 N is applied on it for
10 seconds, what is the change in its kinetic energy :-
(D) 4.4J
O
5. Which of the following is true :-
(A) Momentum is conserved in all collisions but kinetic energy is conserved only in inelastic
collision
O
(B) Neither momentum nor kinetic energy is conserved in inelastic collisions.
(C) Momentum is conserved in all collisions but not kinetic energy
T
(D) Both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved in all collisions.
6. A 1.0 H.P. motor pumps out water from a well of depth 20m and fills a water tank of volume
7.
E
2238 liters at a height of 10 m from the ground. The running time of the motor to fill the
empty water tank is (g = 10ms–2) :-
(A) 5 minutes (B) 10 minutes (C) 15 minutes (D) 20 minutes
A mass of 20 kg moving with a speed of 10 m/s collides with another stationary mass of 5
kg. As a result of the collision, the two masses stick together. The kinetic energy of the
composite mass will be :-
(A) 600 Joule (B) 800 Joule (C) 1000 Joule (D) 1200 Joule
8. The work done against gravity in taking 10 kg. mass at 1 m height in 1 s will be :-
(A) 49 J (B) 98 J (C) 196 J (D) None of these
9. A force of 10N displaces an object by 10m. If work done is 50J then direction of force
make an angle with direction of displacement :-
(A) 120° (B) 90° (C) 60° (D) None of these
10. A heavy body moving with a velocity 20 ms–1 and another small object at rest undergo an
elastic collision. The latter will move with a velocity of :-
(A) 20 m/s. (B) 40 m/s. (C) 60 m/s. (D) Zero
11. A body of mass 5 kg moving with a velocity 10 m/s collides with another body of the
mass 20 kg at rest and comes to rest. Velocity of the second body due to the collision
is :-
A
(A) 2.5m/s (B) 5m/s (C) 7.5m/s (D) 10m/s
12. The kinetic energy of a body becomes four times its initial value. The new linear momentum
will be:-
(A) Four times the initial value
(C) Twice the initial value
D
(B) Thrice the initial value
(D) Same as the initial value
I
I N
13. If a spring extends by x on loading then energy stored by the spring is :- (T is tension in the
spring)
14.
(A)
O
T2
2x
(B)
T2
2k
S (C)
2k
T2
(D)
A bullet of mass m and velocity v is fired into a large block of wood of mass M. The final
velocity of the system is :-
2T 2
k
(A)
TO v+m
m+M
 m+M 
(B) 
 M 
v
 m+v 
(C) 
 M 
v
 m 
(D)  v
 m+M 
E
15. A nucleus of mass number A originally at rest, emits alpha particle with speed v. The recoil
speed of the daughter nucleus is :-
4v 4v v v
(A) (B) (C) (D)
A4 A4 A4 A4
16. Water is falling on the blades of a turbine at a rate of 100 kg/s from a certain spring. If the
height of the spring be 100 metres, the power transferred to the turbine will be :-
(A) 100 kW (B) 10 kW (B) 1 kW (D) 1000 kW
17. A body A experiences perfectly elastic collision with a stationary body B. If after collision
the bodies fly apart in the opposite direction with equal velocities, the mass ratio of A and B
is :-
(A) 1/2 (B) 1/3 (C) 1/4 (D) 1/5
18. A big ball of mass M, moving with velocity u strikes a small ball of mass m, which is at rest.
Finally small ball attains velocity u and big ball v. What is the value of v :-
Mm m 2m M
(A) u (B) u (C) (D) v
M Mm Mm Mm
A
19. A body of mass 2 kg falls from a height of 20 m. What is the loss in potential energy :-
I
(A) 400 J (B) 300 J (C) 200 J (D) 100 J
20. A collision is said to be perfectly inelastic when :-

(A) Coefficient of restitution = 0
(C) Coefficient of restitution = 
D
(B) Coefficient of restitution = 1
(D) Coefficient of restitution < 1
N
I
21. A heavy nucleus at rest breaks into two fragments which fly off with velocities 8 : 1. The
ratio of radii of the fragments is :-
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 1 : 4 (C) 4 : 1 (D) 2 : 1
22.
h
(A)  2 
h
(B)  2 
S
A particle falls from a height ‘h’ upon a fixed horizontal plane and rebounds. If ‘e’ is the
O
coefficient of restitution the total distance travelled before rebounding has stopped is :-
 1  e2   1  e2  h  1  e2 
(C) 2  2
h  1  e2 
(D) 2  2 
O
 1 e   1 e   1 e   1 e 
23.
T
A body of mass 6 kg under a force which causes displacement in it given ‘S =
E
where ‘t’ is time. The work done by the force in 2 seconds is:-
(A) 12J (B) 9J (C) 6J
A B
(D) 3J
t2
4
’ metres
24. If the potential energy of two molecules is give by , U  12

 6
r r
then at equilibrium position, its potential energy is equal to :
(A) A2/4B (B) –B2/4A (C) 2B/A (D) 3A
25. A man m = 80 kg is standing on a trolley of mass 320 kg on a smooth surface. If man starts
walking on trolley along rails at a speed of 1 ms–1, then after 4 sec, his displacement
relative to ground is
(A) 4 m (B) 4.8 m (C) 3.2 m (D) 6 m
26. A stationary particle explodes into two particles of masses m1 and m2 which move in
opposite directions with velocities v1 and v2. The ratio of their kinetic energies E1/E2 is :–
(A) m2/m1 (B) m1/m2 (C) 1 (D) m1v2/m2v1
27. A neutron makes a head on elastic collision with a stationary deuteron. The fractional energy
loss of the neutron in the collision is:-
(A) 16/82 (B) 8/9 (C) 8/27 (D) 2/3
28. If the force applied is F and the velocity gained is v, then the power developed is :-
(A) F/v (B) v/F (C) Fv (D) Fv2
A
29. Two particles of mass MA and MB and there velocities are VA and VB respectively collides.
(A) VA/VB (B) VB/VA

MA
After collision they inter changes their velocities then ratio of M is :-
B
(VA  VB )
(C) (V  V )
D (D) 1
I
N
B A
30.
released is :
(A) 1/2 m (B) m (C) 3/2 m
I
A body of mass 4m at rest explodes into three pieces. Two of the pieces each of mass m
S
move with a speed each in mutually perpendicular directions. The total kinetic energy
(D) 5/2 m
31.
O
If the kinetic energy of a body is double of its initial kinetic energy, then the momentum of
the body will be
O
(A) 2 2 times (B) 2 times (C)
1
times (D) none of these
T
2
E
 
32.  
A force acts F  5iˆ  4ˆj N on a body and produced a displacement S =  6iˆ - 5jˆ + 3kˆ m . The
work done will be

(A) 30 J (B) 40 J (C) 10 J (D) 20 J
33. A mass of 0.5 kg moving with a speed of 1.5 m/s on a horizontal smooth surface, collides
with a nearly weightless spring of force constant k=50N/m. The maximum compression of
the spring would be :-
(A) 0.12 m (B) 1.5 m (C) 0.5 m (D) 0.15m
34. A ball of mass 2 kg and another of mass 4 kg are dropped together from a 60 feet tall
A
building. After a fall of 30 feet each towards earth, their respective kinetic energies will be in
I
the ratio of :-
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
35.
(A) 1.07 kJ (B) 2.14 kJ (C) 2.4 kJ
N D
A bomb of mass 3.0 kg explodes in air into two pieces of masses 2.0 kg and 1.0 kg. The
smaller mass goes at a speed of 80 m/s. The total energy imparted to the two fragments is-
(D) 4.8 kJ
36.
I
A bomb of mass 30Kg at rest explodes into two pieces of masses 18 kg and 12 kg. The
S
velocity of 18kg mass is 6ms–1. The kinetic energy of the other mass is :-
(A) 524 J (B) 256 J (C) 486J (D) 324J
O
37. A force F acting on an object varies with distance x as shown here. The force is in N and x in
m. The work done by the force in moving the object from x = 0 to x = 6m is
TO
38.
E
(A) 18.0 J (B) 13.5 J (C) 4.5 J (D) 9.0 J
A block of mass 10 kg. is moving in x–direction with a constant speed of 10m/sec. It is

subjected to a force F = –0·1 x joules/meter during its travel from x=20 meters to x=30
meters. Its final kinetic energy will be –
(A) 475 joules (B) 450 joules (C) 275 joules (D) 250 joules
39. Two bodies of mass 1kg and 4kg have equal K.E. then the ratio of their momentum is
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 4 : 1 (D) 1 : 4
40. A stone of mass m is tied to a string of length  at one end and by holding second
end it is whirled into a horizontal circle, then work done will be–
 mv 2   mv 2 
(A) 0 (B)    2 (C) (mg)·2 (D)    
   
41. A body of mass 3 kg is under a constant force which causes a displacement s in metres in
1 2
it, given by the relation s = t , where t is in seconds. Work done by the force in 2 seconds
3
is :-
5 3 8 19
(A) 19 J (B) 8 J (C) 3 J (D) 5 J
42. 300 J of work is done in sliding a 2 kg block up an inclined plane of height 10 m. Taking
g = 10 m/s2, work done against friction is :-
I A
(A) 200 J (B) 100 J (C) Zero
43. For inelastic collision between two spherical rigid bodies –

D
(D) 1000 J
N
I
(A) the total kinetic energy is conserved
(B) the total potential energy is conserved
S
(C) the linear momentum is not conserved
(D) the linear momentum is conserved
O
44. Two identical balls, one moves with 12 m/s and second is at rest, collides elastically. After
collision velocity of second and first ball will be :
(A) 6m/s, 6m/s (B) 12m/s, 12m/s (C) 12m/s, 0m/s (D) 0m/s, 12m/s
45.
TO
A body of mass m having an initial velocity v makes head on collision with a stationary body
of mass M. After the collision, the body of mass m comes to rest and only the body having
mass M moves. This will happen only when :-
E
M
(A) m >> M (B) m << M (C) m = M (D) m =
2
46. In stretching a spring by 2 cm energy stored is given by U, then stretching by 10 cm energy

stored will be :-
U
(A) U (B) 5U (C) (D) 25U
25
47. A vertical spring with force constant k is fixed on a table. A ball of mass m at a height h
above the free upper end of the spring falls vertically on the spring, so that the spring is
compressed by a distance d. The net work done in the process is :
1 2 1 1 1
(A) mg(h  d)  kd (B) mg(h  d )  kd 2 (C) mg(h  d)  kd 2 (D) mg(h  d)  kd 2
2 2 2 2
48. If the kinetic energy is increased by 300%, the momentum will increase by :-
(A) 100% (B) 200% (C) 150% (D) 300%
49. If the kinetic energy of a body increases by 4% the momentum :

(A) increases by 2% (B) increases by 4% (C) increases by 8% (D) increases by 16%
50. An explosion blows a rock into three parts. Two parts go off at right angles to each other.
These two are, 1 kg first part moving with a velocity of 12 ms–1 and 2 kg second part
moving with a velocity of 8 ms–1. If the third part flies off with a velocity of 4ms–1, its mass
would be :-
(A) 3kg (B) 5 kg (C) 7 kg (D) 17 kg
51.
I A
A block of mass M is attached to the lower end of a vertical spring. The spring is hung from
a ceiling and has force constant value k. The mass is released from rest with the spring
D
initially unstretched. the maximum extension produced in the length of the spring will be :-
(A) Mg/2k (B) Mg/k (C) 2 Mg/k (D) 4 Mg/k
N
52. An engine pumps water continuously through a hose. Water leaves the hose with a velocity
I
v and m is the mass per unit length of the water jet. What is the rate at which kinetic energy
is imparted to water :-
S
(A) 1/2 m2v2 (B) 1/2 mv3 (C) mv3 (D) 1/2 mv2
53. A body of mass 1 kg is thrown upwards with a velocity 20 m/s. It momentarily comes to rest
O
after attaining a height of 18 m. How much energy is lost due to air friction ? (g = 10 m/s2):-
(A) 10 J (B) 20 J (C) 30 J (D) 40 J
54.
O
An engine pumps water through a hose pipe. Water passes through the pipe and leaves it with a
velocity of 2 m/s. The mass per unit length of water in the pipe is 100 kg/m. What is the power of
T
the engine ?
(A) 800 W (B) 400 W (C) 200 W (D) 100 W
55.
E
A ball moving with velocity 2 m/s collides head on with another stationary ball of double the
mass. If the coefficient of restitution is 0.5, then their velocities (in m/s) after collision will
be :-
(A) 0, 2 (B) 0, 1 (C) 1, 1
56. The potential energy of a system increases if work is done :-

(D) 1, 0.5
(A) Upon the system by a nonconservative force

(B) By the system against a conservative force
(C) By the system against a nonconservative force
(D) Upon the system by a conservative force
57. A body projected vertically from the earth reaches a height equal to earth's radius before
returning to the earth. The power exerted by the gravitational force is greatest :-
(A) At the highest position of the body
(B) At the instant just before the body hits the earth
(C) It remains constant all through
(D) At the instant just after the body is projected
58. Force F on a particle moving in a straight line varies with F(N)

distance d as shown in the figure. The work done on the
particle during its displacement of 12m is :
(A) 18 J 2
(B) 21 J
(C) 26 J
I A
D
(D) 13 J 0 3 7 12 d(m)
59. A stone is dropped from a height h. It hits the ground with a certain momentum P. If the
N
same stone is dropped from a height 100% more than the previous height, the momentum
I
when it hits the ground will change by :-
(A) 200 % (B) 100 %
S
(C) 68% (D) 41%
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
O
A ns. 4 3 1 4 3 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 2 4 1
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A ns. 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 3 1 2 1 4 3
Que.
A ns.
Que.
A ns.
31
2
T
46
O 32
3
47
2
33
4
48
1
34
2
49
1
35
4
50
2
36
3
51
3
37
2
52
2
38
1
53
2
39
2
54
1
40
1
55
2
41
3
56
2
42
2
57
2
43
4
58
4
44
3
59
4
45
3
60
E
EXERCISE–II
1. Which of the following statements is true for work done by conservative forces :–
(A) It does not depend on path
(B) It is equal to the difference of final and initial energy function
(C) It can be recovered completely
2. Which of the following statement is incorrect for a conservative field ?

(A) Work done in going from initial to final position is equal to change in kinetic energy of
the particle.
(B) Work done depends on path but not on initial and final positions.
(C) Work done does not depend on path but depends only on initial and final positions
(D) Work done on a particle in the field for a round trip is zero.
I A
D
3. As shown in the diagram a particle is to be carried from C
point A to C via paths (I), (II) and (III) in gravitational field, I
then which of the following statements is correct :–
N
(A) Work done is same for all the paths II h
I
(B) Work done is minimum for path (II) III
(C) Work done is maximum for path (I)
S
A B
4. The relation between conservative force and potential energy U is given by :–
5.
(A) F 
O O
 dU
dx

(B) F  Udx

Which of the following is a non conservative force:–


(C) F  
dU
dx
(D) None of these
6.
E T
(A) Electric force
(C) Spring force
(B) Gravitational force
(D) Viscous force
A constant force F is applied to a body of mass m moving with initial velocity u. If after the
body undergoes a displacement S its velocity becomes v, then the total work done is
m 2 m 2
(A) m[v2 + u2] (B) [u + v2] (C) [v – u2] (D) m[v2 – u2]
2 2
7. The law of conservation of momentum is based on Newton’s :–

(A) First law of motion (B) Second law of motion
(C) Third law of motion (D) Law of gravitation
8. A ball is dropped from a height of 10m. If 40% of its energy is lost on collision with the earth
then after collision the ball will rebound to a height of –
(A) 10 m (B) 8 m (C) 4 m (D) 6 m
9. A ball strikes the floor and after collision rebounds back. In this state –
(A) Momentum of the ball is conserved
(B) Mechanical energy of the ball is conserved
(C) Momentum of ball–earth system is conserved
(D) The kinetic energy of ball–earth system is not conserved
10. If the values of force and length are increased four times then the unit of energy will increase
by–
(A) 4 times (B) 2 times (C) 8 times (D) 16 times
11. A bullet of mass P is fired with velocity Q in a large body of mass R. The final velocity of the
A
system will be –
12.
(A)
R
P R
(B)
PQ
P R
(C)
(P  Q)
R
D
(D)
A sphere of mass m moving with a constant velocity collides with another stationary sphere
I
(P  R)
P
Q
N
of same mass. The ratio of velocities of two spheres after collision will be, if the co-efficient
I
of restitution is e-
1 e e 1 1 e e 1
(A) (B) .(C) (D)
S
1 e e 1 1 e e 1
13. An electric motor produces a tension of 4500N in a load lifting cable and rolls it at the rate
14.
(A) 9KW
O O
of 2m/s. The power of the motor is –
(B) 15KW (C) 225KW (D) 9 × 103 HP
A ball falls from a height of 5m and strikes the roof of a lift. If at the time of collision, lift is
T
moving in the upward direction with a velocity of 1m/s, then the velocity with which the ball
rebounds after collision will be – (e = 1)
(A) 11 m/s downwards (B) 12 m/s upwards
E
(C) 13 m/s upwards (D) 12 m/s downwards
15. A motor of 100 H.P. is moving with a constant velocity of 72 km/hour. The forward force
exerted by the engine on the car is –
(A) 3·73 × 103 N (B) 3·73 × 102 N (C) 3·73 × 101 N (D) None of the above
16. Two elastic bodies P and Q having equal masses are moving along the same line with
velocities of 16 m/s and 10 m/s respectively. Their velocities after the elastic collision will be
in m/s :-
(A) 0 and 25 (B) 5 and 20 (C) 10 and 16 (D) 20 and 5
17. If the momentum of a body is incresed n times, its kinetic energy increases.
(A) n times (B) 2n times (C) n times (D) n2 times
18. A metal ball does not rebound when struck on a wall, whereas a rubber ball of same mass
when thrown with the same velocity on the wall rebounds. From this it is inferred that –
(A) Change in momentum is same in both
(B) Change in momentum in rubber ball is more
(C) Change in momentum in metal ball is more
(D) Initial momentum of metal ball is more than that of rubber ball
19. The unit of the co–efficient of restitution is –

(A) m/s (B) s/m
(C) m × s (D) None of the above
A
20. A bomb of mass 9 kg explodes into two pieces of 3kg and 6 kg. The velocity of 3 kg piece
21.
is 16 m/s. The kinetic energy of 6 kg piece is –
D
Two solid balls of rubber A and B whose masses are 200 gm and 400 gm respectively, are
moving in mutually opposite directions. If the velocity A is 0·3 m/s and both the balls come
I
N
to rest after collision, then the velocity of ball B is –
I
(A) 0.15 m/s (B) – 0.15 m/s (C) 1.5 m/s (D) None of the above
1
S
22. The graph between Ek and is
p
(EK = kinetic energy and p = momentum) –
(A)
O O Ek
1/p
(B)
Ek
1/p
(C)
Ek
1/p
(D)
Ek
1/p
23.
24.
E T
A 1 Kg ball falls from a height of 25 cm and rebounds upto a height of 9 cm. The co–efficient
of restitution is –
(A) 0·6 (B) 0·32 (C) 0·40 (D) 0·56
The graph between potential energy U and displacement X in the state of stable equilibrium will
be–
U U U
U
(A) (B) (C) (D)
X X X X
25. A force  2
F = (3x +2x–7) N acts on a 2 kg body as a result of which the body gets displaced
from x=0 to x=5m. The work done by the force will be –
26. A 50 gm bullet moving with a velocity of 10 m/s gets embedded into a 950 gm stationary
body. The loss in kinetic energy of the system will be –
(A) 5% (B) 50% (C) 100% (D) 95%
A
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans.
Que. 16
Ans.
4
3
2
17
4
1
18
2
3
19
4
4
20
3
3
21
2
3
22
3
4
23
1
3
24
1
4
25
3
D
2
26
4
1 1
I
2 1
I N
O S
TO
E
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
SIMPLE HARMONIC
MOTION (S.H.M.)
ETOOSINDIA
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION (S.H.M.)
EXERCISE–I
1. A simple pendulum performs simple harmonic motion about x = 0 with an amplitude a and
time period T. The speed of the pendulum at x = a/2 will be :-
a 3 a 3 a 3 2 a
(A) (B) (C) (D)
T 2T T T
2. Which one of the following equations of motion represents simple harmonic motion :-
(A) Acceleration = kx (B) Acceleration = –k0x+k1x2
(C) Acceleration = –k(x + a) (D) Acceleration = k(x + a)
Where k,k0,k1 and a are all positive
3. A particle is executing S.H.M. with amplitude A and Time period T. Time taken by the
particle to reach from extreme position to A/2
I A
D
(A) T/6 (B) T/12 (C) T/3 (D) T/4
4. Total work done on a simple pendulum in one complete oscillation will be :-
N
(A) 1/2 kx2 (B) 1/2 k/A2 (C) kA2 (D) Zero
5.
3cm then potential energy will be :-
(A) 3U (B) U/3 (C) 9U I
The elongation of spring is 1 cm and its potential energy is U. If the spring is elongated by
S (D) U/9
O
6. In S.H.M. Which one of the following quantities has constant ratio with acceleration :-
(A) Time (B) Displacement
(C) Velocity (D) Mass
7.
TO
The period of oscillation of a mass M suspended from a spring of negligible mass is T. If
along with it another mass M is also suspended, the period of oscillation will now be :-
T
E
(A) 2T (B) T (C) (D) 2T
2
8. The displacement of a particle along the x axis is given by x = a sin2t. The motion of the
particle corresponds to :-
(A) simple harmonic motion of frequency /2
(B) simple harmonic motion of frequency /
(C) simple harmonic motion of frequency 3/2
(D) non simple harmonic motion
9. The displacement x as a function of time t of a simple harmonic motion is represented by
d2 x dx d2 x d2 x
(A) 2 – Ax = 0 (B) + A2x = 0 (C) 2 + A2x2 = 0 (D) 2 + A2x = 0
dt dt dt dt
where A is a positive constant.
10. The potential energy of a spring when stretched by a distance x is E. The energy of the
spring when stretched by x/2 is
(A) E (B) E/2 (C) E/4 (D) E/6
11. The displacement y of a particle varies with time t, in seconds, as

y = 2 cos (t + /6).
The time period of the oscillations is
(A) 2sec (C) 4sec (C) 1sec (D) 0.5sec
12. Two particles are oscillating along two close parallel straight lines side by side, with the
same frequency and amplitudes. They pass each other, moving in opposite directions
A
when their displacement is half of the amplitude. The phase difference is:-
(A) /6 (B) 0 (C) 2/3 (D) 
D
13. Out of the following functions representing motion of a particle which represents SHM :
(i) y = sint – cos t
(ii) y = sin3t
I
 3
(iii) y  5cos 
4

 3 t 

I N
S
(iv) y = 1 + t + 2t2
(A) Only (i) (B) Only (iv) does not represent SHM
(C) Only (i) and (iii) (D) Only (i) and (ii)
O O
14. The equation of a simple harmonic wave is given by :
y = 3 sin /2 (50 t – x),
where x and y are in metres and t is in seconds. The ratio of maximum particle velocity to
the wave velocity is :-
(A) 3
E T (B) 2/3 (C) 2 (D) 3/2 
15. A particle moving about its equilibrium position with equation y = – ax - bt. Interepret the
condition :-
(A) It will always perform the SHM (B) It can never perform the SHM
(C) It can perform SHM only when t  bx/a (D) It can perform SHM only when t  bx/a
ANSWER KEY EXERCISE - I
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. A C A D C B A B D C A C C D B
EXERCISE - II
1. The acceleration of a particle executing S.H.M. is

(A) Always directed towards the equillibrium position
(B) Always towards the one end
(C) Continuously changing in direction
(D) Maximum at the mean position
2. A particle executing S.H.M. completes a distance (taking friction as negligible) in one

complete time period, equal to :
(A) Four times the amplitude (B) Two times the amplitude
A
(C) One times the amplitude (D) Eight times the amplitude
3. A particle of mass m is executing S.H.M. If amplitude is a and frequency n, the value of its
force constant will be :
(A) mn2 (B) 4mn2a2 (C) ma2
D
(D) 42mn2 I
4.
I
 d2 x 
N
The equation of motion of a particle executing SHM is  2  + kx = 0. The time period of
 dt 
S
the particle will be :
(A) 2/ k (B) 2/k (C) 2k (D) 2 k
5.
O
The phase of a particle in S.H.M. is /2, then :
(A) Its velocity will be maximum.
O
(B) Its acceleration will be minimum.
(C) Restoring force on it will be minimum. (D) Its displacement will be maximum.
T
6. The displacement of a particle in S.H.M. is indicated by equation y = 10 sin(20t + /3)
where y is in metres. The value of time period of vibration will be (in seconds) :
E
(A) 10/ (B) /10 (C) 2/10 (D) 10/2
7. In the above question, the value of maximum velocity of the particle will be :
(A) 100 m/sec. (B) 150 m/sec. (C) 200 m/sec. (D) 400 m/sec.
8. In the above question, the value of phase constant will be :

(A) Zero (B) 45° (C) 60° (D) 30°
9. The phase of a particle in SHM at time t is /6. The following inference is drawn from this:
(A) The particle is at x = a/2 and moving in + X-direction
(B) The particle is at x = a/2 and moving in – X-direction
(C) The particle is at x = –a/2 and moving in + X-direction
(D) The particle is at x = –a/2 and moving in – X-direction
10. The value of phase at maximum distance from the mean position of a particle in S.H.M. is :
(A) /2 (B)  (C) Zero (D) 
11. Two particles execute S.H.M. along the same line at the same frequency. They move in
opposite direction at the mean position. The phase difference will be :
(A) 2 (B) 2/3 (C)  (D) /2
12. The displacement from mean position of a particle in SHM at 3 seconds is 3 / 2 of the
amplitude. Its time period will be :
(A) 18 sec. (B) 6 3 sec. (C) 9 sec. (D) 3 3 sec.
13. A particle executes SHM of type x = asint. It takes time t1 from x = 0 to x = a/2 and t2 from
x = a/2 to x = a. The ratio of t1 : t2 will be :
I A
D
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 1 : 3 (D) 2 : 1
14. The time taken by a particle in SHM for maximum displacement is :
N
(A) T/8 (B) T/6 (C) T/2 (D) T/4
distance of half the amplitude from mean position is :

(A) 3 sec. (B) 2 sec. (C) 1 sec.
S I
15. A particle executes SHM with periodic time of 6 seconds. The time taken for traversing a
(D) 1/2 sec.
O
16. The phase difference between the displacement and acceleration of particle executing
S.H.M. in radian is :
(A) /4 (B) /2 (C)  (D) 2
(A) /4
O
17. The phase difference in radians between displacement and velocity in S.H.M. is :
T (B) /2 (C)  (D) 2
E
18. If the maximum velocity of a particle in SHM is v0. then its velocity at half the amplitude from
position of rest will be :
(A) v0/2 (B) v0 (C) v 0 3 / 2 (D) v 0 3 / 2
19. At a particular position the velocity of a particle in SHM with amplitude a is 3 /2 that at its
mean position. In this position, its displacement is :
(A) a/2 (B) 3 a/2 (C) a 2 (D) 2a
20. The acceleration of a particle in SHM at 5 cms from its mean position is 20 cm/sec2. The
value of angular velocity in radians/sec will be :
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 10 (D) 14
21. The amplitude of a particle in SHM is 5 cms and its time period is . At a displacement of
3 cms from its mean position the velocity in cms/sec will be :
(A) 8 (B) 12 (C) 2 (D) 16
22. The maximum velocity and acceleration of a particle in S.H.M. are 100 cms/sec and 157
cm/sec2 respectively. The time period in seconds will be :
(A) 4 (B) 1.57 (C) 0.25 (D) 1
23. If the displacement, velocity and acceleration of a particle in SHM are 1 cm, 1cm/sec,
1cm/sec2 respectively its time period will be (in seconds) :
(A)  (B) 0.5 (C) 2 (D) 1.5
24. The particle is executing S.H.M. on a line 4 cms long. If its velocity at mean position is 12
cm/sec, its frequency in Hertz will be :
I A
D
(A) 2/3 (B) 3/2 (C) /3 (D) 3/
25. If the amplitude of a simple pendulum is doubled, how many times will the value of its
N
maximum velocity be that of the maximum velocity in initial case :
I
(A) 1/2 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 1/4
S
26. Which of the following statement is incorrect for an object executing S.H.M. :
(A) The value of acceleration is maximum at the extreme points
(B) The total work done for completing one oscillation is zero.
O
(C) The energy changes from one form to another
(D) The velocity at the mean position is zero
TO
27. The variation of acceleration (a) and displacement (x) of the particle executing SHM is
indicated by the following curve :
a a
E
(A)
a
x
(B)
a
x
(C) (D)
x x
28. The total energy of a vibrating particle in SHM is E. If its amplitude and time period are
doubled, its total energy will be :
(A) 16E (B) 8E (C) 4E (D) E
29. The total vibrational energy of a particle in S.H.M. is E. Its kinetic energy at half the ampli-
tude from mean position will be :
(A) E/2 (B) E/3 (C) E/4 (D) 3E/4
30. If total energy of a particle in SHM is E, then the potential energy of the particle at half the
amplitude will be :
(A) E/2 (B) E/4 (C) 3E/4 (D) E/8
31. A particle executes SHM on a line 8 cm long. Its K.E. and P.E. will be equal when its
distance from the mean position is :
(A) 4 cm (B) 2 cm (C) 2 2 cm (D) 2 cm
32. The energy of a simple harmonic oscillator in the state of rest is 3 Joules. If its mean K.E.
is 4 joules, its total energy will be :
I A
D
(A) 7J (B) 8J (C) 10J (D) 11J
N
33. The total energy of a harmonic oscillator of mass 2kg is 9 joules. If its energy at rest is 5
I
joules, its K.E. at the mean position will be :
(A) 9J (B) 14J (C) 4J (D) 11J
34. The average P.E. of a body executing S.H.M. is :

(A) 1/2 ka2
O
(B) 1/4 ka2 (C) ka2
S
35. The value of total mechanical energy of a particle in S.H.M. is :
(A) Always constant (B) Depand on time
(D) Zero
O
2 2
(C) 1/2 kA cos (t+) (D) 1/2 mA2 cos2(t+)
T
36. The maximum K.E. of a oscillating spring is 5 joules and its amplitude 10 cms. The force
constant of the spring is :
(A) 100 Newton/m. (B) 1000 Newton–m (C) 1000 Newton/m. (D) 1000 watts.
E
37. The force acting on a 4gm mass in the potential field U = 8x2 at x = –2cm is :
(A) 8 dyne (B) 4 dyne (C) 16 dyne (D) 32 dyne
38. On suspending a mass m from a spring of force constant k, frequency of vibration f is

obtained. If a second spring as shown in the figure, is arranged then the frequency will be :
(A) f 2 (B) f/ 2 (C) 2f (D) f

39. In the adjoining figure the frequency of oscillation for a mass m will be proportional to :
(A) k1k2 (B) k1 + k2 (C) k1  k 2 (D) 1/ k1  k 2
A
40. An object of mass m is suspended from a spring and it executes S.H.M. with frequency .
I
If the mass is increased 4 times, the new frequency will be :
(A) 2 (B) /2 (C)  (D) /4
mass m. Its effective force constant will be :
N D
41. As shown in the figure, two light springs of force constant k1 and k2 oscillate a block of
I
K1 K2
m
(A) k1k2
O
(B) k1 + k2
S 1 1
(C) k  k
1 2
42. The spring constants of two springs of same length are k1 and k2 as shown in figure. If an
k1k 2
(D) k  k
1 2
O
object of mass m is suspended and set vibration, the time period will be :
E T k1
m
k2
mk1 m m
(A) 2 (B) 2 k k (C) 2 k  k (D) 2 m / k 1  k 2 
k2 1 2 1 2
43. The total spring constant of the system as shown in the figure will be :
k1 k1
k2
 1 1
 
1
I
2 1
(D)    A 1
D
(A) k1/2 + k2 (B)  (C) 1/2k1+1/k2
 2k1 k 2   k1 k 2 
44. Some springs are combined in series and parallel arrangement as shown in the figure
N
and a mass m is suspended from them. The ratio of their frequencies will be :
S I k k
O O m
K
m
k
E T
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 1 3 :2 (C)
(D) 4 : 1
45. A spring is made to oscillate after suspending a mass m from one of its ends. The time
period obtained is 2 seconds. On increasing the mass by 2 kg, the period of oscillation is
increased by 1 second. The initial mass m will be :
(A) 2 kg (B) 1 kg (C) 0.5 kg (D) 1.6 kg
46. The time period of a spring pendulum on earth is T. If it is taken on the moon, and made to
oscillate, the period of vibration will be :
(A) Less than T (B) Equal to T (C) More than T (D) None of these
47. On loading a spring with bob, its period of oscillation in a vertical plane is T. If this spring
pendulum is tied with one end to the a friction less table and made to oscillate in a horizontal,
plane, its period of oscillation will be :
(A) T (B) 2T
(C) T/2 (D) will not execute S.H.M.
48. In a winding (spring) watch, the energy is stored in the form of :

(A) Kinetic energy (B) Potential energy (C) Electrical energy (D) None of these
49. In an artificial satellite, the object used is :

(A) Spring watch (B) Pendulum watch
(C) Watches of both spring and pendulum (D) None of these
50. The time period of an oscillating body executing SHM is 0.05 sec and its amplitude is
40 cm. The maximum velocity of particle is :
(A) 16ms–1 (B) 2ms–1 (C) 3.1 ms–1 (D) 4 m/s
A
51. The mass of a bob, suspended in a simple pendulum, is halved from the initial mass, its
time period will :
(A) Be less
(C) Remain unchanged
(B) Be more
(D) None of these
D
52. The length of a simple pendulum is 39.2/2m. If g = 9.8 m/sec2, the value of time period is:
I
N
(A) 4 sec. (B) 8 sec. (C) 2 sec. (D) 3 sec.
with respect to its previous value will :

(A) Become twice (B) Not be different
S I
53. The length of a simple pendulum is increased four times of its initial value, its time period
(C) Be halved (D) Be 2 times
(A) 1 sec.
O O
54. The time taken for a second pendulum from one extreme point to another is :
(B) 2 sec. (C) 1/2 sec.
55. The length of a seconds pendulum is (approximately) :

(D) 4 sec.
T
(A) 1 m. (B) 1 cm. (C) 2 m. (D) 2 cm.
56. The acceleration due to gravity at height R above the surface of the earth is g/4. The
E
periodic time of a simple pendulum in an artificial satellite at this height will be :
(A) T = 2 2 / g (B) T = 2  / 2g (C) Zero
57. In an artificial satellite, the use of a pendulum watch is discarded, because :

(A) The satellite is in a constant state of motion
(B) The value of g becomes zero in the earth satellite
(D) Infinity
(C) The periodic time of the pendulum watch is reduced

(D) None of these
58. An oscillating pendulum stops, because its energy

(A) Changes into kinetic energy (B) Change into potential energy
(C) Change into heat energy (D) Is destroyed
59. Simple pendulum of large length is made equal to the radius of the earth. Its period of oscillation
will be :
(A) 84.6 min. (B) 59.8 min. (C) 42.3 min. (D) 21.15 min.
60. The maximum time period of oscillation of a simple pendulum of large length is:
(A) Infinity (B) 24 hours (C) 12 hours (D) 1½ hours
61. In a simple oscillating pendulum, the work done by the string in one oscillation will be:
(A) Equal to the total energy of the pendulum
(B) Equal to the K.E. of the pendulum
(C) Equal to the P.E. of the pendulum
A
(D) Zero
62. The equation of a simple harmonic motion is x = 0.34cos(3000t + 0.74). Where x and t are
in mm and sec. respectively. The frequency of the motion is :
(A) 3000 (B) 3000/2 (C) 0.74/2 (D) 3000/
D I
N
63. Mass ‘m’ is suspended from a spring of force constant K. Spring is cut into two equal parts
I
and same mass is suspended from it, then new frequency will be:

S
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C)  (D)
2
O
ANSWER KEY EXERCISE - II
Q ue . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
O
A ns . A A D A D B C C A A C A B D D
Q ue . 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
T
A ns . C B D A A A C D B D A A D D B
Q ue . 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
A ns . C D C B A C D A C B D D B C D
E
Q ue . 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
A ns . B A B A A C A A A A D B C B D
Q ue . 61 62 63
A ns . D B B
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
WAVE THEORY, SOUND

WAVES AND DOPPLER
EFFECTS
ETOOSINDIA
WAVE THEORY, SOUND WAVES AND

DOPPLER EFFECTS
EXERCISE–I
1. Water waves are of the nature :
(A) Transverse (B) Longitudinal
(C) Sometimes langitudinal and some times transverse and longitudinal both
(D) Neither transverse nor longitudinal
 x 
The equation of a progressive wave are Y  sin 200  t 
A
2. , x is in meter and f is in
 330  
I

second. The frequency and velocity of wave are
(A) 100 Hz, 5 m/s (B) 300 Hz, 100 m/s
D
(C) 100 Hz, 330 m/s (D) 30 m/s, 5 Hz
N
 x 
The equation of a progressive wave for a wire is : Y  4 sin   8t    if x and y are
I
3.
2  8 
measured in cm then velocity of wave is :
4.
(A) 64 cm/s along - x direction
(C) 32 cm/s along + x direction
O S (B) 32 cm/s along - x direction

(D) 64 cm/s along + x direction
At a particle two simple harmonic motion are acting along the same direction. These are
y1 = a1Sin t and y2 = a2sin (t+) The resultant motion is also a simple harmonic motion
O
whose amplitude will be:
(A) a12  a22  2a1a 2Cos (B) a12  a22  2a1a2Cos
5.
(C)
E T a12  a22  2a1a2Cos
The energy in the superposition of waves :

(A) Is lost (B) Increase
(D) a12  a22  2a1a 2Cos
(C) remain same, only redistribution occurs (D) None of the above
6. The apparent change in the pitch of sound due to relative motion between observer and
the source is called:
(A) Doppler's effect (B) Resonance of waves
(C) interference (D) none of the above
7. A siren blown in workshop emits waves of frequency 1000 Hz A car driver approaches the
workshop with velocity 90 km/hour then frequency of sound heard by driver will be in Hz.
(A) 926 (B) 1076 (C) 1176 (D) 1000
8. A star is continuously moving away from us than the wavelength coming from star on the
earth :
(A) Will shift towards voilet colour
(B) Will shift towards red colour.
(C) remain unchanged
(D) Will shift sometimes towards voilet and while some other time it will shift towards red
colour.
9. Due to propagation of longitudinal wave in a medium, the following quantities also propa-
gate in the same direction :
(A) Energy, Momentum and Mass (B) Energy
A
(C) Energy and Mass (D) Energy and Linear Mementum
10. If at some point the amplitude of the sound becomes double and the frequency becomes
(A) Become double

(C) Become one fourth
(B) Be half
(D) Remain unchanged
D I
one fourth then at that point the intensity of sound at that point the intensity of sound will be:
11.
I N
A sound is produced in water and moves towards surface of water and some sound moves
in air velocity of sound in water is 1450 m/s and that in air is 330 m/s. When sound moves
S
from water to air then the effect on frequency f and wave length  will be:
(A) f and  will remain same (B) f will remain same but  will increase
(C) f will remain same but  will decrease (D) f will increase and  will decrease
O O
12. The velocity of sound in a gas depends
(A) only on its wave length
(C) on intensity of the sound
(B) on the density and the elasticity of gas
(D) on the amplitude and the frequency.
(A) 1:1 T
13. Waves from two sources superpose on each other at a particular point amplitude and
frequency of both the waves are equal. The ratio of intensities when both waves reach in
E
the same phase and they reach with the phase difference of 900 will be
(B) 2:1 (C) 2:1 (D) 4:1
14. A source of frequency 200 Hz is moving towards an observer with a velocity equal to the
sound velocity V. If observer also moves away from the source with same velocity then
apparent frequency heard by observer will be :
(A) 50 Hz (B) 160 Hz (C) 150 Hz (D) 200 Hz
15. Which of the following is true :

(A) The sound and the light wave are both longitudinal waves
(B) Both the sound and light wave are transverse
(C) In air the sound waves are longitudinal as well as transverse
(D) In air the sound waves are longitudinal are the light waves are transverse
16. Sound wave are not polarized because :

(A) Their speed is less
(B) the medium is needed for their propagation
(C) These are longitudinal
(D) Their speed depands on temperature
17. The displacement equation of a progressive wave along Y - axis is : Y = 5 sin (60 t + 2x),
here x, y are in metre and t is in seconds the wave expressed by this euation :
(A) has wavelength equal to 2 meter
(B) has time period equal to / 15 second
(C) moves with a velocity of 30 m per second along negative x - axis.
A
(D) has frequency equal to (151) Hz.
which of the following statement is true ?

(A) = 18 cm
D
(B) amplitude=0.04 cm/s
I
18. The equation of progressive wave is Y  4 sin   t  x     where x and y are in cm.
  5 9 6 
N
(C) velocity v =50 cm/s (D) frequency f = 20 Hz
the linear velocity. The dimension of K is :

(A) LT (B) T (C) T-1
S I
19. The equation of wave is given as Y = A sin (x/V – K)] Where  is the angular velocity and V is
(D) T2
O
20. Two waves whose intensity are same (I) move towards a point P in same phase the resultant
intensity at point P will be:
(A) 4 I (B) 2 I (C) 2 I (D) I
TO
21. The speed of sound in air at constant temperature
(A) is proportional to the atmospheric pressure.
(B) is proportional to the square of atmospheric pressure.
E
(C) is propertional to the square root of atmospheric pressure
(D) does not depend on atmospheric pressure.
22. At a place the speed of sound of frequency 300 Hz is V. At the same place the speed of
150 Hz sound will be :
(A) V/2 (B) V (C) 2V (D) 4V
23. Ratio of amplitudes of two waves is 3:4. The ratio of maximum and minimum intensity
obtained from then will be :
(A) 7:1 (B) 49:1 (C) 1:25 (D) 5:1
24. An observer moving towards a stationary source observer that the apparent frequency is
three times the actual frequency then velocity of observer will be (sound velocity is V)
(A) 3V (B) 2V (C) 4V (D) V/2
25. Doppler's effect in the from of frequency doesn't depend upon :

(A) Frequency produced by waves (B) velocity of Source
(C) Velocity of observer. (D) Separation between Source & observer.
26. In a string the speed of wave is 10 m/s and its frequancy is 100 Hz . The value of the phase
difference at a distance 2.5 cm will be :
(A) /2 (B) /8 (C) 3/2 (D) 2
27. A source and a listener are moving towards each other with a speed (1/10)th that of
I
sound. If frequency of sound emitted by the source is f than the frequency heard by listener
A
D
will be :
(A) f (B) 1.11 f (C) 1.22 f (D) 1.27 f
N
28. The wavelength of a distant star is 5700 A° and the spectral light has a shift of 1.9 A°
I
towards red end then the velocity of star relative to the earth will be:
(A) 5x105 m/sec (B) 2x105 m/sec (C) 1.8 x 105 m/sec (D) 1 x105 m/sec.
O
(A) 1.2x107 m/sec S
29. The wavelength of the light received from a galaxy is 0.4% greater than the wave length on
the earth then the velocity of galaxy relative to the earth will be:
(B) 1.2 x 106 m/sec (C) 1.2 x 105 m/sec (D) 1.2 x 104 m/sec
30. The term "Red shift" reterring to doppler's effect for light repersent which of following
TO
property :
(A) decrease in frequency
(C) decreate in intensity
(B) increase in frequency
(D) Increase in intensity
E
31. Two trains A and B are moving in the same direction with velocities 30 m/s and 10 m/s
respectively, B is behind from A and A blows a horn of frequency 450 Hz. Then the appar-
ent frequency heard by the sound is 330 m/s :
(A) 425 Hz (B) 300 Hz (C) 450 Hz (D) 350 Hz
32. The frequency of a whistle is 256 Hz. Its approaching towards in observer with a speed 1/
3 the speed of sound. The frequency of sound as heard by the observer will be :
(A) 384 Hz (B) 300 Hz (C) 200 Hz (D) 192 Hz
33. At the room temperature the velocity of sound in O2 gas is V. Then in mixture of H2 and O2
gas the speed of sound at same temprature:
(A) will be less than V (B) will be more than V
(C) will be equal to V (D) nothing can be said
34. If the wavelength of light emitted by a star is shifted towards red and then the star is :
(A) going away from earth (B) approaching earth
(C) stationary (D) none of the above
35. If a star emitting light of wavelength 5000 Å is moving towards earth with a velocity of
1.5 x 106 m/s then the shift in the wave length due to Doppler's effect will be :
(A) 2.5 Å (B) 250 Å (C) 25 Å (D) Zero
36. A car moving at a speed of 28 m/s blows a horn of frequency 500 Hz and overtakes a car
moving in the same direction with a speed of 13 m/s. The apparent frequency heard by the
observe of another car will be (after overtaking) : (move speed = 342 m/sec.)
A
(A) 480 Hz (B) 500 Hz (C) 520 Hz (D) 580 Hz
37. Two source of sound s1 and s2 emitting sound of frequency 324 Hz and 320 Hz are situated
D
at certain distance apart. An observer moves along the line joining the two sources. What
I
should be the velocity of the observer if no beats are heard : (Velocity of sound is 344 m/s)
(A) 20 m/s (B) 10 m/s (C) 5 m/s (D) 2.1 m/s
I N
38. An astronaut approaches moon and sends a signal of frequency 5000 M Hz. The fre-
quency of the reflected signal increases by 86 K Hz. The speed of the astronaut in Km/s
S
will be
(A) 1.29 (B) 2.58 (C) 5.16 (D) 10.32
O
39. With the increase of temperature, the frequency of the organ pipe-
(A) increases (B) decrease
(C) remains unchanged (D) can not say
TO
40. A source and an observe moves away from each other, with a velocity of 15 M/sec. with
respect to ground. If observer finds the frequency of sound coming from source as 1950 Hz.
Then actual frequency of source will be (velocity of sound = 340 M/sec.) :
E
(A) 1785 Hz (B) 1968 Hz (C) 1950 Hz (D) 2130 Hz
41. When the volocity of sound in air is 350 m/sec. Then the fundamental frequency of an open
organ pipe of length 50 cm, will be
(A) 980 Hz (B) 880 Hz (C) 350 Hz (D) none of these
42. Length of a sonometer wire is either 95 cm or 100 cm. In both the cases a tuning fork
produces 4 beats then the frequency of tuning fork is-
(A) 152 (B) 156 (C) 160 (D) 164
43. A tuning fork produces 4 beats/sec. with another tuning fork B of frequency 288 Hz. If fork
is loaded with little wax. No of beats per sec decreases. The frequency of the fork A,
before loading is
(A) 290 Hz (B) 288 Hz (C) 292 Hz (D) 284 Hz
 t x
44. Equation of progressive wave is givey by y  a sin     where t is in secon and x is in
2 4
meter. Then the distance through which the wave moves is 4 second is :-
(A) 16 m (B) 8 m (C) 5m (5) 2m
45. A tuning fork makes 256 vibration per second in air. When velocity of sound is 330 m/sec.
Then the wavelengths of the tone emitted will be :-
(A) 1.29 m (B) 2.11 m (C) 0.69 m (D) 2.58 m
46. When sound wave travels from air to water, which are of the following remain constant :
A
(A) wavelength (B) velocity (C) frequency (D) phase
47. A thunder tap is heared 5.5 second after the lightening flash. The distance of the flash is
(velocity of sound in air is 330 m/sec.) :-
(A) 3560 m (B) 300 m (C) 1780 m
D
(D) 1815 m I
N
48. The waves in which the particles of the medium vibrate in a direction perpendicular to the
I
direction of wave motion is known as :
(A) transverse waves (B) propagated waves
S
(C) longitudinal waves (D) stationary waves
49. Newton's formula for the velocity of sound in gases is :
(A) v 
O O 2p

(B) v 
p

(C) v 
50. Intensity level of a sound of intensity I is 30 dB. The ration I/I0 is


p
(D) v 
3 p
2 
E T
(I0 is the threshold of hearing)
(A) 1000 (B) 3000 (C) 300
51. A tuning fork A produces 4 beats/sec with another tuning fork B of frequency 320 Hz. On
(D) 30
filling the fork A, 4 beats/sec. are again heared. The frequency of fork A, before filling is:
(A) 318 (B) 316 (C) 324 (D) 312
52. If vibrations of a string are to be increased to a factor of two, then tension in the string must
be made :
(A) half (B) thrice (C) four times (D) eight times
53. A siren emitting sound of frequency 500 Hz is going away form a static listener with a speed of 50
m/sec. The frequency of sound to be heared directly from the ziren is :
(A) 434.2 Hz (B) 589.3 Hz (C) 484.2 Hz (D) 256.5 Hz
54. Waves that can not be polarized are

(A) Transverse waves (B) Longitudinal waves
(C) Light waves (D) Electromagnetic waves
55. A source X of unknown frequency produces 8 beats per second with a source of 250 Hz
and 12 beats per second with a source of 270 Hz. The frequency of the source X is (Hz).
(A) 242 (B) 258 (C) 282 (D) 262
56. An empty vessel is partially filled with water the frequency of vibration of air column in the
vessel
(A) decreases (B) increases
A
(C) depends on the purity of water (D) remains the same
57. If m is the velocity of sound in moist air and d is the velocity of sound in dry air then :
(A) m < d (B) m > d
58. Transverse waves can propagate

(C) d >> m
D
(D) m = d
I
N
(A) only in solids (B) both in solids and gases
I
(C) neither is solids nor in gases (D) only in gases
S
59. A man standing on a cliff claps his hand and hears its echo after one second. If the sound
in reflected from another mountain then the distance between the man & reflection points
is Vsound = 340 m/sec.
O
(A) 680 m (B) 340 m (C) 170 m (D) 85 m
60. A sound source is moving towards a stationary listener with 1/10th of the speed of the
TO
sound. The ratio of apparent to real frequency will be :-
(A) (11/10)2 (B) (9/10)2 (C) 10/9 (D) 11/10
61. Two waves x = A sin(t + ) and y = A sin (t + ) are working simultaneously and perpen-
E
dicularly to each other on a point such that    
(A) Circular & Clockwise

(C) Ellipse

2
the particle will make a figure of –
(B) Circular & Anticlockwise

(D) Parabola
62. Two stationary sources each emitting waves of wave length . An observer moves from
one source to other with velocity u. Then number of beats heared by him:-
(A) 2u/ (B) u/ (C) u (D) u/2
63. Two waves are said to be coherent, if they have

(A) different frequency but different amplitude
(B) same phase and different amplitudes
(C) same frequency, phase and amplitudes
(D) different frequency, phase and amplitudes
64. A wave is represented by the equation : y = a sin (0.01 x – 2t) where a and x are is cm.
Velocity of propagation of wave is :
(A) 20 cm/s (B) 50 cm/s (C) 100 cm/s (D) 200 cm/s
65. A vehicle, with a horn of frequency n is moving with a velocity of 30 m/s in a direction
A
perpendicular to the straight line joining the observer and the vehicle. The observer
s) :
(A) n1 = 10 n (B) n1 = – n (C) n1 = 0
D
(D) n1 = 2n
66. A string is rigided by two ends and its equation is given by y = cos2t sin 2x.
I
perceives the sound to have a frequency n + n1. Then : (Take velocity of sound in air 330 m/
N
Then minimum length of string is
I
(A) 1m (B) 1/2m (C) 5m (D) 2m
S
67. A air column having one end closed contains minimum resonance length 50 cm. if it is
vibrated by same tuning fork then its next resonance length will be
(A) 250 cm (B) 200 cm (C) 150 cm (D) 100 cm
(A) 10 cm O
68. If the velocity of wave is 360 m/sec. and frequency 500 Hz then find the path difference
corresponding to 60° phase difference –
O (B) 12 cm (C) 15 cm (D) 72
(A) 262 T
69. Two tuning forks having frequency 256 Hz (A) and 262 Hz (B) tuning fork. A produces
some beats per second with unknown tuning fork, same unknown tuning fork produce
E
double beats per second from B tuning fork then the frequency of unknown tuning fork is
(B) 260 (C) 250 (D) 300
70. A tuning fork gives 4 beats with 50 cm length of a sonometer wire if the length of the wire is
shortened by 1 cm. the no. of beats still the same. The frequency of the fork is –
(A) 396 (B) 400 (C) 404 (D) 384
71. Two wave are represented by equation

y1 = a sin t
y2 = a cos t
the first wave –
(A) leads the second by  (B) lags the second by 
(C) leads the second by /2 (D) lags the second by /2
72. Stationary waves are so called because in them –

(A) The particles of the medium are not disturbed at all
(B) The particles of the medium do not execute S.H. M.
(C) There occur no flow of energy along the wave
(D) The interference effect can't be observed
73. Transverse wave of some frequency are generated in two steel wires A and B the diam-
eter of A is twice of B and the tension in A is half that in B The ratio of velocities of waves in
A and B is –
(A) 1: 2 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 3 : 2 2 (D) 1: 2 2
A
74. The maximum length of a closed pipe that would produce a just audible sound is (Vsound =
I
336 m/s)
(A) 4.2 cm (B) 4.2 m (C) 4.2 mm (D) 1.0 cm
D
75. In a somemeter wire, the tension is maintained by suspending a M mass from free end of
wire. The fundamental frequency of the wire is N Hz. Of the suspended mass is completely
N
immerged in water the fundamental frequency will become
I
(A) increases (B) constant (C) decrease (D) can't say
76. A second harmonic has to generated in a string of length  stretched between two rigid
O
(A) Pluck at

2

touch at
3
4
3
S
supports. The points where the string has to be plucked and touched are –
(B) Pluck at

2

touch at

4
O
(C) Pluck at touch at (D) Pluck at touch at
4 4 4 2
77. In a stationary wave all the particles of medium cross the mean position with --------
T
(A) same speed (B) same velocity
(C) different velocity same instant (D) different velocity same different
E
78. A sine wave has an amplitude A and waelength Let V be wave velocity and v be the
maximum velocity of a particle in medium then.
(A) V = if A 

2
3A
(B) V can not be equal to 
(C) V =  if   (D) V=  if A = 2 
2
79. A wave is represented by the eqn y = a sin(kx – t) is superimposed with another wave to
form a stationary wave such that the point x = 0 is a node. Then the equation of other wave
is -
(A) y = a cos (kx – t) (B) y = acos (kx + t)
(C) y = – asin (kx + t) (D) y = a sin (kx + t)
80. 16 tuning forks are arranged in increasing order of frequency. Any two consecutive tuning
forks when sounded together produce 8 beats per second. If the freqency of last tuning
fork is twice that of first the frequency of first tuning fork is –
(A) 60 (B) 80 (C) 100 (D) 120
81. A wave represented by the equation y = a cos (t – kx) is superposed by another wave to
form a stationary wave such that the point x = 0 is a node the equation for other wae is –
(A) y = a sin (t + kx) (B) y = – a cos (t – kx)
(C) y = – a cos (t + kx) (D) y = – a sin (t – kx)
82. Two coherent sources of intensities I1 and I2 produce an interference pattern the maximum
A
intensity in the interference patteren will be –
(A) I1 + I2 (B) I12 + I22
83. Transverse elastic waves can be propagate in

(A) Both solid & gas
(C) (I1+I2)2
(B) In solid but not gas

D
(D) 
I
I1  I 2 
2
(C) neither solid nor gas (D) None
I N
84. If the equation of motion of standing wave is y = 0.3 sin (314t – 1.57 x)m, then the velocity
S
of progressive wave will be :-
(A) 100 m/s (B) 300 m/s (C) 200 m/s (D) 400 m/s
O
85. A body is walking away from a wall towards an observer at a speed of 1 m/s and blows a
whistle whose frequency is 680 Hz. The number of beats heard by the observer per sec-
O
ond is :- (velocity of sound in air = 340 m/s)
(A) 4 (B) 8 (C) 2 (D) zero
T
86. The equation of a wave is y = cos (100t – x) where y and x are in cm and t in second. The
wavelength of this wave is :
E
(A) 100 cm
87. Echo is due to :-

(B) 5 cm
(A) diffraction of sound

(C) 3 cm (D) 2 cm
(B) interference of sound

(C) refraction of sound (D) reflection of sound
88. If the air column in a pipe which is closed at one end, is in resonance with a vibrating tuning
fork at a frequency 260 Hz, then the length of the air column is :
(A) 35.7 cm (B) 31.7 cm (C) 12.5 cm (D) 62.5 cm
89. Doppler effect for light differs from that for sound in regards that :
(A) the relative frequency shift is maller for light than for sound.
(B) the velocity addition valid for sound is not true for light waves.
(C) velocity of light is very large as compared to sound.
(D) light waves are electromagnetic waves but sound waves are mechanical.
90. If the tension and diameter of a somometer wire f fundamental frequency is doubled and
density is halved then its fundamental frequency will become
n
(A) n/4 (B) 2n (C) n (D)
2
91. A sings with a frequency (n) and B sings with a frequency 1/8 that of A. If the energy re-
mains the same and the amplitude of A is a, then amplitude of B will be :
I A
D
(A) 2a (B) 8a (C) 4a (D) a
92. The tension in a paino wire is 10N. What should be the tension in the wire to produce a
N
note of double the frequency ?
I
(A) 10N (B) 20N (C) 40N (D) 80N
S
93. Sound waves produces more diffraction with respect to light wave because :-
(A) Sound > light
(B) sound = light
O
(C) sound < light
(D) Sound waves are longitudenal but light waves are transverse.
O
94. Two waves of intensities ratio are 9:1 then the ratio of their maximum and minimum intensities
will be :-
T
(A) 10 : 8 (B) 7 : 2 (C) 4 : 1 (D) 2 : 1
E
95. A sound wave of frquency 330Hz is incident normally at reflected wall then minimum distance
from wall at which partical vibrate very much :-(Vsound = 330 m/s)
(A) 0.25 m (B) 0.125 m (C) 1 m (D) 0.5 m
96. An open organ pipe of length 33 cm, vibrates with frequency 1000 Hz. If velocity of sound is
330 m/s, then its frequency is:-
(A) Fundamental frequency (B) First overtone of pipe
(C) Second overtone (D) Fourth overtone
97. A sound wave of frequency 50Hz, has velocity 360 m/s. If phase difference between two
particles is 60°, then path difference will be:-
(A) 1.2 m (B) 0.12 m (C) 2.4 m (D) 12 m
98. If a source is moving away from a stationary obsrver with half of velocity of sound. The
frequency observed will be :-
(A) one-third (B) doubled (C) halved (D) two-third
99. The phase difference between two particles separated by 1 m in a wave of frequency 120
Hz is 90°. The wave velocity will be :-
(A) 720 m/sec. (B) 480 m/sec. (C) 240 m/sec. (D) 180 m/sec.
100. Fundamental frequency of sonometer wire is n. If the length, tension and diameter of wire
are tripled, the new fundamental frequency is :-
A
(A) n 3 (B) n/3 (C) n 3 (D) n 3 3
101. In a resonance tube the first resonance with a tuning fork occurs at 16 cm and second at
49 cm. If the velocity of sound is 330 m/s, the frequency of tuning fork is :-
(A) 500 (B) 300 (C) 330
D
(D) 165
I
N
102. This distance between two consecutive crests in a wave train produced in string is 5 m. If
I
two complete waves pass through any point per second, the velocity of wave is
(A) 2.5 m/s (B) 5 m/s (C) 10 m/s (D) 15 m/s
The speed of the wave (incident and relfected) is :

(A) 5 m/s (B) 10 m/s S
103. Wave of frequency 100 Hz travels along a string towards its fixed end. When this wave
travels back, after reflection a node is formed at a distance of 10 cm from the fixed end.
O (C) 20 m/s (D) 40 m/s
O
104. A wave of frequency 500 Hz travels between X and Yand travel distance of 600 m in 2 sec.
between X and Y. How many wavelngth are there in distance XY :
T
(A) 1000 (B) 300 (C) 180 (D) 2000
E
105. The equation of a wave motion (with t in seconds and x in metres) is given by
 
y  7 sin  7t  0.4x   . The velocity of the wave will be :
 3
(A) 17.5 m/s (B) 49/2 m/s (C) 49 m/s (D) 2/49 m/s
106. A whistle revolves in a circle with angular speed = 20 rad/sec. using a string of length 50
cm. If the frequency of sound from the whistle is 385 Hz, then what is the minimum frequency
heared by an observer which is far away from the centre : (Vsound = 340 m/s)
(A) 385 Hz (B) 374 Hz (C) 394 Hz (D) 333 Hz
107. If equation of a sound wave is y = 0.0015 sin (62.8x + 314t) then its wavelength will be :
(A) 2 unit (B) 0.3 unit (C) 0.1 unit (D) 0.2 unit
108. A siren emitting sound of frequency 800 Hz is going away from a static listener with a
speed of 30 m/s. Frequency of sound to be heared by the listener is : (Velocity of sound =
330 m/s) :-
(A) 286.5 Hz (B) 481.2 Hz (C) 733.3 Hz (D) 644.8 Hz
109. The graph between wave number (  ) and angular frequency () is :
frequency ()
frequency ()
frequency ( )
frequency ( )
Angular
Angular
Angular
Angular
(A) (B) (C) (D)
A
Wave no. ( ) Wave no. (– ) Wave no. (–
) Wave no. (–
)
110. A string in a musical instrument is 50 cm long and its funamental frequency is 800 Hz. If a
frequency of 1000 Hz is to be produced, then required length of string is :
(A) 62.5 cm (B) 50 cm (C) 40 cm (D) 37.5
D I
N
111. What is the path difference for destructive interference?
I
( n  1)  (2n  1)
(A) n (B) n(+ 1) (C) (D)
2 2
frequencies is
(A) 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 (B) 16 : 9 : 4 : 1 (C) 1 : 4 : 9 : 16
S
112. Four wires of identical lengths, diameters and of the same material are stretched on a
sonometer wire. The ratio of their tension is 1 : 4 : 9 : 16. The ratio of their fundamental
O (D) 4 : 3 : 2 : 1
TO
113. If T is the reverberation time of an auditorium of volume V then
(A) T 
1
V
(B) T V (C) T 
1
V2
(D) T V2
(A) 5
E
114. If the velocity of wave is 360 m/s and frequency is 50 Hz determine the path diference
corrosponding to 60° phase diff.
(B) 50
(B) 3 : 2
(C) 1.2
(C) 1 : 3
(D) 12
115. If intensity ratio of to wave is 9 : 1 then ratio of maximum to minimum amplitude ratio is
(A) 2 : 1 (D) 5 : 2
116. Given equation is related to
 2 
y = cos  x  cos(2t)
 
(A) Transeverse progressive (B) Longitudinal progressive
(C) Longitudinal stationary wave (D) Transvers stationary wave
117. The length of sonometer wire is 40 cm. It produced 5 beat/sec. with a tuning fork as wire
length is reduced by 1 cm there is no change in No of beat per sec. then frequency of
tuning fork in :-
(A) 400 (B) 395 (C) 390 (D) 385
118. Two wires are fixed in a sonometer. Their tensions are in the ratio 8:1. The lengths are in
the ratio 36:35. the diameters are in the ratio 4:1. Densities of the materials are in the ratio
1:2. If the higher frequency in the setting is 360 Hz, the beat frequency when the two wires
sounded together is:
(A) 8 (B) 5 (C) 10 (D) 6
A
119. If V is the speed of sound in air then the shortest length of the closed pipe which resonants
to a frequency n :
(A) V/2n (B) V /4n (C) 4n/V (D) 2n/V
D
120. A source and an observer is coming towards each other with velocity 'Vs" and "V0"
respectively. Then the ratio of apparent frequncy to actual frequancy is : I
N
v  v0 v  v0 v  v0 v 0  v0
(A) v  v (B) v  v (C) v  v (D) v  v
I
s s s s
121. As temperature increase difference between apparent doppler frq. and actual frequncy
S
(A) Decreases (B) Remains unchanged
(C) Increases
(D) Depending on frequency, increase or decrease.
O O  t
122. If the equation of tranverse wave y  5sin  
in sec, then the wavelength of wave will be :

(A) 20 cm (B) 80 cm
x
  , where distance is in cm and time
0.04 40 
(C) 60 cm (D) 40 cm
E T
123. The period of SHM of a particle is 12 s. The phase difference between the position at
t = 3s and t = 4s will be :
(A) /4 (B) 3/5 (C) /6 (D) /2
124. A stretched string is 1 m long. Its mass per unit length is 0.5 g/m. It is stretched with a force
of 20 N. It plucked at a distance of 25 cm from one end. The frequency of note emitted by
it will be :
(A) 400 Hz (B) 300 Hz (C) 200 Hz (D) 100 Hz
125. A source of sound of frequency n and a listener approach each other with a velocity equal
to 1/20 of velocity of sound. The apparent frequency heard by the listener is :
(A) (21/19)n (B) (20/21)n (C) (21/20)n (D) (19/20)n
126. A wire has frequency f. Its length is doubled by stretching. Its frequency now will be :
(A) 1.4 f (B) 0.7 f (C) 2f (D) f
127. Velocity of sound in medium is V. If the density of the medium is doubled, what will be the
new velocity of sound ?
(A) 2V (B)V (C) V 2 (D) 2V
128. What is the beat frequency produced when following two waves are sounded together ?
x1 = 10 sin (404t – 5x),
x2 = 10 sin (400t – 5x).
(A) 4 (B) 1 (C) 3 (D) 2
129. Two oscillations x1 = Asin t, x2 = Acos t superimpose at right angles in X and Y axis
A
respectively. What will be the resultant wave form ?
I
(A) ellipse (B) straight line (C) circle (D) sinusoidal.
130. A wave travelling in positive X-direction with amplitude = 0.2 m. velocity = 360 m/sec. and
=60 mts, then correct expression for the wave is:
(A) y = 0.2 sin [2 (6t + x/60)]
(C) y = 0.2 sin [2 (6t – x/60)]
D
(B) y = 0.2 sin [ (6t + x/60)]
N
(D) y = 0.2 sin [ (6t – x/60)]
(C) Applied periodic force is small

I
131. In case of a forced vibration, the resonance wave becomes very sharp when the :–
(A) Damping force is small. (B) Restoring force is small.
S
(D) Quality factor is small.
O
132. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound with a speed 1/5th of the speed
of sound. The wavelength and frequency of the source emitted are  and f respectively.
The apparent frequency and wavelength recorded by the observer are respectively :–
O
(A) 1.2f, 1.2 (B) 1.2f,  (C) f, 1.2 (D) 0.8f, 0.8
T
133. An earthquake generates both transverse (S) and longitudinal (P) sound waves in the
earth. The speed of S waves is about 4.5 km/s and that of P waves is about 8.0 km/s. A
E
seismograph records P and S waves from an earthquake. The first P wave arrives 4.0 min
before the first S wave. The epicenter of the earthquake is located at a distance of about
(A) 25 km (B) 250 km (C) 2500 km (D) 5000 km
134. Two waves of wavelength 50 cm and 51 cm produced 12 beats per sec. The velocity of
sound will be :-
(A) 340 m/s (B) 332 m/s (C) 153 m/s (D) 306 m/s
135. The first overtone of a stretched wire of given length is 320 Hz. The first harmonic is :-
(A) 320 Hz (B) 160 Hz (C) 480 Hz (D) 640 Hz.
136. What is minimum length of a tube, open at both ends, that resonantes with tuning fork of
frequency 350 Hz ? (velocity of sound in air = 350 m/s)
(A) 50 cm (B) 100 cm (C) 75 cm (D) 25 cm
 x 
137. A stretched string is vibrating according to the equation y  5sin   cos 4t , where y
2
and a are in cm and t is sec. The distance between two consecutive nodes on the strings
is :-
(A) 2 cm (B) 4 cm (C) 8 cm (D) 16 cm
138. An underwater sonar source operating at a frequency of 60 kHz directs its beam towards
the surface. If velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s, wavelength and frequency of the waves in
air are:-
(A) 5.5 mm, 60 kHz (B) 3.30 m, 60kHz (C) 5.5 mm, 30 kHz (D) 5.5 mm, 80 kHz
A
139. When beats are produced by two progressive waves of the same amplitude and of nearly
I
the same frequency, the ratio of maximum intensity to the intensity of one of the waves will
be n. Where n is
D
(A) 3 (B) 1 (C) 4 (D) 2
140. A wave is expressed by the equation y = 0.5 sin (0.01 x – 3t) determine wave speed.
N
Where x, y are in metre :
I
(A) 150 m/s (B) 300 m/s (C) 350 m/s (D) 250 m/s
S
141. A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.5 m hangs from ceiling. The speed of trans-
verse wave in the rope at upper end and at a point 0.5 m distance from lower end will be :
(A) 5 m/s, 2.24 m/s (B) 10 m/s, 3.23 m/s (C) 7.5 m/s, 1.2 m/s (D) 2.25 m/s, 5 m/s
O
142. A whistle giving out 450 Hz approaches a stationary observer at a speed of 33 m/s. The
frequency heard by the observer in Hz is (velocity of sound in air = 333 ms–1)
(A) 409 (B) 429 (C) 517 (D) 500
O
143. A train passes through a platform with velocity 30 m/s. Frequency of whistle is 300Hz. What
will be the apparent frequency. If velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s –
T
(A) 441 Hz (B) 420 Hz (C) 490 Hz (D) 329 Hz
E
144. Two waves Y1 = asint and Y2 = asin(t + ) are producing interference, then resultent
intensity is proportional to :-
2 2  2 2  2 2  2 2 
(A) a cos (B) 2a cos (C) 3a cos (D) 4a cos
2 2 2 2
145. A train is moving with 30 m/s and speed of sound in air is 340 m/s. Another train is moving
in opposite direction with speed 15 m/s, then apparent frequency (genereted frequency by
first train is 440 Hz and observer is in second train)–
(A) 458 Hz (B) 450 Hz (C) 503 Hz (D) 490 Hz
146. The lengths of two closed organ pipes are 0.750 m and 0.770 m. If they are sounded
together, 3 beats per second are produced. The velocity of sound will be :-
(A) 350.5 m/sec (B) 335.5 m/sec
(C) 346.5 m/sec (D) None of these
147. A car is moving towards a high cliff. The car driver sounds a horn of frequency ‘f’. The
reflected sound heard by the driver has a frequency 2f. If ‘v’ be the velocity of sound then
the velocity of the car, in the same velocity units, will be :
(A) v/3 (B) v/4 (C) v/2 (D) v / 2
148. The waves produced by a motorboat sailing in water are
(A) Transverse (B) Longitudinal
(C) Longitudinal and transverse (D) Stationary
149. An organ pipe closed at one end has fundamental frequency of 1500 Hz. The maximum number
of overtones generated by this pipe which a normal person can hear is
A
(A) 14 (B) 13 (C) 6 (D) 9
150. A source is emitting sound of frequency of 200 vibrations per second which is moving
towards listner with the speed of 'v' which is equal to speed of sound in the medium, if
D
listner is moving away from the source with the same speed 'v' then virtual frequency for
listner is –
I
N
(A) 50 vib/sec (B) 100 vib/sec (C) 150 vib/sec (D) 200 vib/sec
sec.)
(A) 80 Hz (B) 240 Hz
S I
151. Length of the close organ pipe is 1 m. At which frequency resonance will not occur (v = 320 m/
(C) 300 Hz (D) 400 Hz
O
152. Two sources have frequency 256 Hz and 258 Hz, then time difference between two
consecutive maxima is –
(A)1 s (B) 0·5 s (C) 2 ms (D) None
(A) 3
TO
153. Two vibrating tuning forks produce progressive waves given by Y1 = 4 sin 500t and Y2 =
2 sin 506 t. Number of beats produced per minute is :
(B) 360 (C) 180 (D) 60
E
154. Wavelenght of monochromatic light is 5000Å, then wave number will be :-
(A) 2 × 106 m–1 (B) 2 × 10–7 m–1 (C) 4 × 106 m–1 (D) 2.5 × 107 m–1
155. The end correction of resonance tube is 1 cm. If lowest resonant length is 15 cm then next
resonant lenght will be :-
(A) 36 cm (B) 45 cm (C) 46 cm (D) 47 cm
156. If the fundamental frequency for a COP is n, then the next three overtones will have ratio :-
(A) 2 : 3 : 4 (B) 3 : 4 : 5 (C) 3 : 7 : 11 (D) 3 : 5 : 7
157. A man is sitting in fast moving train. Horn frequency of train is n and if frequency of horn
heard by the man is n' then : -
(A) n' = n (B) n' > n (C) n' < n (D) n'  n
158. Velocity of star is 106 m/s and frequency of emitted light is 4.5 × 1014 Hz. If star is moving
away, then apparent frequency will be :
(A) 4.5 Hz. (B) 4.5 × 1016 Hz. (C) 4.485 × 1014 Hz. (D) 4.5 × 108 Hz.
159. In COP at temp. 10 °C the number of beats are 5. If temp. is made to 20°C the number of
beats will be :
(A) less than 5 (B) equal to 5
(C) more than 5 (D) nothing can be said
160. Two sound waves with wavelengths 5.0 m and 5.5 m respectively, each propagate in a
gas with velocity 330 m/s. We expect the following number of beats per second :-
(A) 12 (B) 0 (C) 1 (D) 6
161. A transverse wave propagating along x-axis is represented by

y(x, t) = 8.0 sin (0.5x – 4t – /4)
I A
D
where x is in metres and t is in seconds. The speed of the wave is :-
(A) 4 m/s (B) 0.5  m/s (C) /4 m/s (D) 8 m/s
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 1/2
I (D) 1
N
162. The time of reverberation of a room A is one second. What will be the time (in seconds) of
reverberation of a room, having all the dimensions double of those of room A :-
163. Which one of the following statements is true:-

(A) Both light and sound waves in air are transverse
O S
(B) The sound waves in air are longitudinal while the light waves are transverse
(C) Both light and sound waves in air are longitudinal
O
(D) Both light and sound waves can travel in vacuum
164. A boat at anchor is rocked by waves whose crests are 100m apart and velocity is 25m/
E T
sec. The boat bounces up once in every –
(A) 2500 s (B) 75 s (C) 4 s (D) 0·25 s
165. For waves propagating in a medium, identify the property that is independent of the others:-
(A) Velocity
(C) Frequency
(B) Wavelength
(D) All these depend on each other
166. When a guitar string is sounded with a 440 Hz tuning fork a beat frequency of 5 Hz is heard
if the experiment is repeated with a tuning fork of 437 Hz. the beat frequency is 8 Hz. The
string frequency (Hz) is –
(A) 445 (B) 435 (C) 429 (D) 448
167. The displacement x (in metres) of a particle performing simple harmonic motion is related
to time (t in seconds) as x = 0.05 cos(4t + /4). The frequency of the motion will be -
(A) 0.5 Hz (B) 1.0 Hz (C) 1.5 Hz (D) 2.0 Hz
168. Linear density of a string is 1.3 × 10–4 kg/m and wave equation is y = 0.021sin(x + 30t).
Find the tension in the string where x = in meter, t in sec.
(A) 1.17 × 10–2 (B) 1.17 × 10–1 (C) 1.17 × 10–3 (D) None
169. An open resonating tube has fundamental frequency of n. When half of its length is dipped
into water, then its fundamental frequency will be :
(A) n (B) n/2 (C) 2n (D) 3/2 n.
170. The driver of a car travelling with speed 30 m/sec towards a hill sounds a horn of frequency
600 Hz. If the velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s, the frequency of reflected sound as heard
by driver is
A
(A) 500 Hz (B) 550 Hz (C) 555.5 Hz (D) 720 Hz
with a speed of 128 m/sec. and it is noted that 5 complete waves fit in 4 m length of the
string. The equation describing the wave is :-
(A) y = (0.02) m sin (7.85x – 1005t) (B) y = (0.02) m sin (7.85x + 1005t)
I
171. A wave in a string has an amplitude of 2cm. The wave travels in the + ve direction of x axis
D
N
(C) y = (0.02) m sin (15.7x – 2010t) (D) y = (0.02)m sin (15.7x + 2010t)
(A) A (B) A/2 (C) A
S I
172. A transverse wave is represented by y = A sin (t – kx). For what value of the wavelenth is
the wave velocity equal to the maximum particle velocity ?
(D) 2A
O
173. A tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz makes 4 beats per second with the vibrating string of a
piano. The beat frequency decreases to 2 beats per seconds when the tension in the
piano string is slightly increased. The frequency of the piano string before increasing the
TO
tension was :
(A) 508 Hz (B) 510 Hz (C) 514 Hz (D) 516 Hz
174. The number of beats per second resulting from the vibration x1 = a cos 500t and x2 = a
E
cos 508t is
(A) zero (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 8
175. Two coherent light sources emit light of the

(A) same intensity
(B) same pitch
(C) constant but different wavelengths
(D) same frequency having constant phase difference
176. Two waves are represented by the equations y1 = asin (t + kx + 0.57) m and
y2 = a cos (t + kx) m where x is in meter and t in sec. The phase difference between them
is :-
(A) 1.0 radian (B) 1.25 radian (C) 1.57 radian (D) 0.57 radian
177. Sound waves travel at 350 m/s through a warm air and at 3500 m/s through brass. The
wavelength of a 700 Hz acoustic wave as it enters brass from warm air :
(A) decreases by a factor 10 (B) increases by a factor 20
(C) increases by a factor 10 (D) decreases by a factor 20
178. Two identical piano wires, kept under the same tension T have a fundamental frequency of
600 Hz. The fractional increase in the tension of one of the wires which will lead to
occurrence of 6 beats/s when both the wires oscillate together would be :-
(A) 0.01 (B) 0.02 (C) 0.03 (D) 0.04
179. What is your observation when two source are emitting sound with frequency 499 Hz &
A
501 Hz:
(A) Frequency of 500 Hz is heard with change in intensity takes place twice.
(B) Frequency of 500 Hz is heard with change in intensity takes place Once.
(C) Frequency of 2Hz is heard with change in intensity takes place Once.
(D) Frequency of 2Hz is heard with change in intensity takes place twice.
D I
N
180. Two sources of sound placed closed to each other, are emitting progressive waves given
I
by
y1 = 4 sin 600t and y2 = 5 sin 608t
S
An observer located near these two sources ratio sound will hear :-
(A) 8 beats per second with intensity ratio 81 : 1 between waxing and waning
(B) 4 beats per second with intensity ratio 81 : 1 between waxing and waning
O
(C) 4 beats per second with intensity ratio 25 : 16 between waxing and waning
(D) 8 beats per second with intensity ratio 25 : 16 between waxing and waning
TO
181. A train moving at a speed of 220 ms–1 towards a stationary object, emits a sound of
frequency 1000Hz. Some of the sound reaching the object gets reflected back to the train
as echo. The frequency of the echo as detected by the driver of the train is : (speed of
sound in air is 330 ms–1)
E
(A) 5000 Hz (B) 3000 Hz (C) 3500 Hz (D) 4000 Hz
182. Two sinusoidal waves of intensity I having same frequency and same amplitude interferes
constructively at a point. The resultant intensity at that point will be :-
(A) I (B) 2I (C) 4I (D) 8I
EXERCISE - II
1. A tube closed at one end and containing air produces, when excited the fundamental note of
frequency 512 Hz. If the tube is open at both ends,the fundamental frequency that can be
excited is (in Hz)
(A) 1024 (B) 512 (C) 256 (D) 128
2. An air column in pipe,which is closed at one end will be in resonance with a vibrating
tuning fork of frequency 264 Hz if the length of the column in cm is :
(A) 31.25 (B) 62.50 (C) 110 (D) 125
3. Velocity of sound in air is 320 m/s. A pipe closed at one end has a length of 1 m neglecting
A
end corrections, the air column in the pipe can resonante for sound of frequency.
4.
(i) 80 Hz
(A) i
(ii) 240 Hz
(B) i, ii
(iii) 500 Hz
(C) i, ii, iv
(iv) 400 Hz
(D) i, iv
D I
The velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s the fundamental frequency of an organ pipe open at
both ends and length 0.3 metre will be:
N
(A) 200 Hz (B) 550 Hz (C) 300 Hz (D) 275 Hz
5.
S I
A hollow matallic tube of length L and closed at one end produce resonance with a tuning
fork of frequency n . The entire tube is then heated carefully so that at equilbrium temperature
its length changes by . If the change in velocity V of sound is v, the resonance will now be
produced by tuning fork of frequency.
O
(A) (V +v) / [4(L +)] (B) (V +v) / [4(L -)]
(C) (V -v) / [4(L +)] (D) (V -v) / [4(L -)]
6.
O
When two tuning forks are sounded together x beats/sec are heard frequency of A
is n. Now when one prong of B is loaded with a little wax, the number of beats per
T
second decreases the frequency of fork B is :
(A) n + x (B) n - x (C) n-x2 (D) n - 2x
7.
8.
E
A simple harmonic wave having amplitude A and time period T is represented by the
equation y = 5 sin(t + 4) metre. The values of A (in meter) and T(in sec.) are
(A) A=5, T=2 (B) A=10, T=1 (B) A=5, T=1 (D) A=10, T=2
If at a place the speed of a sound wave of frequency 300 Hz is V, the speed of another
wave of frequency 150 Hz at the same place will be:
(A) V (B) V/2 (C) 2V (D) 4V
9. The power of sound from the speaker of a radio is 20 milli.watt by turning the knob of the
volume control the power of the sound is increased to 400 milliwatt. The power increase in
decibles as compared to the original power is :
(A) 13 db (B) 10 db (C) 20 db (D) 800 db
10. A man standing between two cliffs hears the first echo of a sound after 2 sec. and the
second echo 3 sec. after the intial sound. If the speed of sound be 330 m/s. The distance
between the two cliffs should be:
(A) 1650 m (B) 990 m (C) 825 m (D) 660 m
11. A man standing between two cliffs claps his hands and starts hearing a series of echoes at
intervals of 2 sec. since the speed of sound in air is 340 m/sec. The distance between the
cliffs must be:
(A) 340 m (B) 680 m (C) 1020 m (D) 170 m
12. A source x of unknown frequency produces 8 beats with a source of 250 Hz and 12 beats
A
with a source of 270 Hz. The frequency of source x is :
(A) 258 Hz (B) 242 Hz (C) 262 Hz (D) 282 Hz
D
13. Two waves of wave length 2 m and 2.02 m respectively moving with the same velocity
superimpose to produce 2 beats per sec. The velocity of the wave is:
(A) 400.0 m/s (B) 402 m/s (C) 404 m/s (D) 406 m/s
I
I N
14. Sound source of frequnecy 170 Hz is placed near a wall. A man walking from the source
towards the wall finds, that there is periodic rise and tall of sound intensity. It the speed of
S
sound in air is 340 m/s the distance separating the two adjacent portions of minimum
intensity is:
(A) (1/2) m (B) (3/2) m (C) 1 m (D) 2 m
O
15. A wave of frequency 100 Hz travels along a string towards its fixed end when this wave
travels back, after reflection a node is formed at a distance of 10 cm from the fixed end.
O
The speed of the wave (incident and reflected) is :
(A) 5 m/s (B) 10 m/s (C) 20 m/s (D) 40 m/s
E T
16. Stationary wave is represented by Y = A sin (100 t) cos (0.01 x) where y and A are in mm, t
in sec and x in m. The velocity of the wave :
(A) 1 m/s (B) 102 m/s (C) 104 m/s (D) not derivable
17. A uniform string of length L and mass M is fixed at both ends under tension T, Then it can
vibrate with frequency given by the formula.
1 T 1 T 1 T 1 M
(A) f = (B) f = (C) f = (D) f =
2 ML 2L M 2 M 2 LT
18. It the tension in a sonometer wire is increased by a factor of four. The fundamental fre-
quency of vibration changes by a factor of :
(A) 4 (B) (1/4) (C) 2 (D) (1/2)
19. A stretched wire of length 114 cm is divider into three segment whose frequencies are in
the ratio 1 : 3 : 4, the length of the segments must be in the ratio :
(A) 18 : 24 : 72 (B) 24 : 72 : 18 (C) 24 : 18 : 72 (D) 72 : 24 : 18
20. The speed of transverse waves in a stretched string is 700 cm/s. It the string is 2 m long,
the frequency with which it resonantes in fundamental mode is :
(A) (7/2) Hz (B) (7/4) Hz (C) (14) Hz (D) (2/7) Hz
21. If the velocity of sound in air is 320 m/s the frequency of the fundamental note emited by a
tube of length 1m closed at one end is :
(A) 80 Hz (B) 240 Hz (C) 320 Hz (D) 400 Hz
22. An open pipe is suddenly closed with the result that the scond overtone of the closed pipe
is found to be higher in frequency by 100 Hz, than the first overtone of the original pipe. The
I A
D
fundamental frequency of open pipe will be :
(A) 100 Hz (B) 300 Hz (C)150 Hz (D) 200 Hz
N
23. Frequency of tuning fork A is 256 Hz. It produces four beats/sec. with tuning fork B. When
I
wax is applied at tuning fork B then 6 beats/sec. are heard. Frequency of B is :
(A) 252 (B) 260 Hz (C) (A) & (B) both (D) 264
S
24. As shown in fig AB is one metre long cylinder. At the ends A&B and middle point C these
are thin flexible diapharm there is H2 in AC and O2 filled in part BC. diapharm A & B are
O
oscillated with some freq. when there is antinode at C then ratio of their minimum fre-
quency na / nb will be : ( VH = 1100 m /sec), V0 = 300 m/sec
(A) 11/3 A C B
(B) 11/7
(C) 9/7
(D) 9/11
TO H
0.5
O2
0.5
2
E
25. Frequency of tuning fork A is 256 Hz. It produces four beats/sec. with tuning fork B. When
wax is applied at tuning fork B then 6 beats/sec. are heard. By reducing little amount of
wax 4 beats/sec. are heard. Frequency of B is :
(A) 250 Hz (B) 260 Hz (C) 252 Hz (D) 256 Hz
26. A somometer wire, with a suspended mass of M = 1 kg., is in resonance with a given
tuning fork. The apparatus is taken to moon where the acceleration due to gravity is 1/6
that of earth. To obtain resonance on the moon, the value of M should be
(A) 1 kg. (B) 6 kg (C) 6 kg (D) 36 kg
27. Figure shows the shape of a part of a long are produced by attaching one end of string to
a tuning fork of frequency 250 Hz. What is the velocity of the waves ?
dispalcement
5 cm
0.3 cm
0 0.1 cm 0.5 cm
5 cm
(A) 1 ms-1 (B) 1.5 ms-1 (C) 2.0-1 (D) 2.5 ms-1
28. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound with a velocity one tenth the
A
velocity of sound. The apparent increases in frequency is -
I
(A) zero (B) 5% (C) 10% (D) 0.1%
D
29. A plane progessive wave is respresented by the equation y = 0.25 cos (2t - x). The
equation of a wave is with double the amplitude and half frequency but travelling in the
opposite direction will be.
N
(A) y = 0.5 cos (t - x) (B) y = 0.5 cos (t + x)
I
(C) y = 0.25 cos (t + 2x) (D) y = 0.5 cos (t + x)
S
30. A, B and C are three tuning forks the frequency of A is 350 Hz. A and B produce 5 beats/
sec. While B and C produce 4 beats/sec. When A is loaded with wax it produces 2 beats/
s with B, and 6 beats/s with C. The frequency of B & C is -
O
(A) 341 Hz, 359 Hz (B) 345 Hz, 341 Hz (C) 359 Hz, 345 Hz (D) 355 Hz, 341 Hz
31. A closed organ pipe of length 1.5 m it have some gas it vibrate in fandamantal mode.
O
Another open organ pipe of same length but filled with air, resonates with the same fork in
its fundamental mode if the temperature of the room be 300c and the speed of sound in air
T
at 300c be 360 m/s the speed of sound in the gas at 00c is:
(A) 637 m/s (B) 683 m/s (C) 341.5 m/s (D) 318 m/s
E
32. A wave y = 10 sin (ax + bt) is reflected from a dense medium at an origin. If 81% of energy
is reflected then the equation of reflected wave is:
(A) y = –8.1 sin (ax - bt)
(C) y = –9 sin (bt - ax)
(B) y = 8.1 sin (ax + bt)
(D) y = 10 sin (ax - bt)
33. A progressive wave of frequency 500 Hz is travelling with a velocity of 360 m/sec. How far
apart are two point, which have difference of 120° phase :
(A) 0.12 m (B) 0.24 m (C) 0.18 m (D) 0.26 m
34. A steel wire of length 1m, mass 0.1 kg and uniform cross sectional area 10-6 m2 is rigidly
fixed at both ends. The temp difference of wire is 200 c. If the transverse waves are set up
by plucking the string in the middle calcutate freq. of fundamental mode of vibration.
(y = 2x1011 N/m2 ,  = 1.21x10-5 /0c) [Hint : T = yA t]
(A) 11 Hz (B) 20 Hz (C) 22 Hz (D) 15Hz
35. A string under a tension of 129.6 N produces 10 beats /sec when it is vibrated along with
a tuning fork. When the tension is the string is increased to 160 N. it sounds in unison with
same tuning fork. calculate fundamental freq. of tuning fork.
(A) 100 Hz (B) 50 Hz (C) 150 Hz (D) 200 Hz
36. For a certain organ pipe three successive resonable frequencies are observed at 425,
595 and 765 Hz respectively taking the speed of sound in air to be 340 m/sec (i) whether
the pipe is closed end or open end (ii) determine the length of pipe.
(A) closed end, 1 m (B) open end, 1 m (C) closed end, 2m (D) open end, 1 m
37. An under water swimmer sends a sound signal to the surface. It is produces 5 beats/sec
A
when compared with fundamental tone of a pipe of 20 cm length closed at one end what is
wavelength of sound in water. (take Vwater = 1500 m/sec Vair - 360m/sec)
(A) 3.3 m or 3.37 m (B) 4.4 m or 4.47 m (C) 2.5 m or 2.7 m (D) 1m or 1.7 m
D
38. A person observes a change of 2.5% in frequency of sound of horn of a car. If the car is
approaching forward the person & sound velocity is 320 m/sec., then velocity of car in m/
I
N
sec will be approximately.
I
(A) 8 (B) 800 (C)7 (D) 6
39. A source of sound of frequency 1000 Hz is moving with a uniform velocity 20 m/s. The ratio
S
of apparent frequency heard by the observer before and after the source crosses him
would be:
(A) 9 :8 (B) 8:9 (C) 1:1 (D) 9:10
O O
40. Two sound sources (of same frequency) are placed at distance of 100 meter. An observer
when moving between both sources hears 4 beats per second. The distance between
sound source is now changed to 400 meter then the beats/second heard by observer will
be:
(A) 2
E T (B) 4 (C) 8 (D) 16
41. A sound source is moving towards a stationary listener with 1/10th of the speed of sound.
The ratio of apparent to real frequency is :
(A) 11/10 (B) (11/10)2 (C) (9/10)2 (D) 10/9
42. A railway engine moving with a speed of 60 m/sec passes in front of a stationary listner. The
real freq. of whistle is 400 Hz. Calculate the apparant freq. heared by listner (a) when the
engine is approaching the listener. (b) when the engine moving away from the listner (V =
340 m/sec)
(A) 485.7 Hz, 340 Hz (B) 220 Hz, 180 Hz (C) 320 Hz,155 Hz (D) 400 Hz, 330 Hz
43. A sound source in moving with speed 5 m/s towards a wall. If the velocity of sound in 330
m/s the stationary observer would hear beats is equal to(frequency of source = 240 Hz) -
(A) 0 (B) 0 or 8 (C) 8 (D) 0 or 4
44. Doppler effect for sound depands upon the relative motion of source and listerner and it
also depends upon that which one of these is in motion. whereas in doppler effect for light
it only depends upon the relative motion of the source of sound and observer. The reason
for It is :
(A) Einstein's mass energy relation (B) Einstein's theory of relativity
(C) Photo electric effect (D) none of above
45. A source of sound of frequency 90 vibrations/sec is approaching a stationary observer
with a speed euqal to 1/10 the speed of sound. What will be the frequency heard by the
observer ?
(A) 80 vibrations/sec (B) 90 vibrations/sec
(C) 100 vibrations/sec (D) 120 vibrations/sec
A
46. A source of sound of frequency 500 Hz is moving towards an observer with velocity 30 m/
s. The speed of sound is 330 m/s. The frequency heard by the observer will be :
(A) 550 Hz (B) 458.3 Hz (C) 530 Hz (D) 545.5 Hz
D
47. A source of sound having freqency 300Hz emitted waves of wavelength 1m. The listner is
at rest the source is moving away from it with a velocity of 30 m/sec find the frequency
heared by observer.
I
N
(A) 270 Hz (B) 273 Hz (C) 373 Hz (D) 300 Hz
I
48. A locomotive engine is approaching a hill with speed of 30 m/s. It blows whistle of frequency
600 Hz the frequency of the echo of the whistle as heard by the driver of the engin is V/ofu =
S
330 m/s
(A) 600 Hz (B) 660 Hz (C) 720 Hz (D) 550 Hz
49. A bus is moving with a velocity of 5 m/s towards a huge wall. The driver sounds a horn of
O
frequency 165Hz. If the speed of sound in air is 335 m/s No. of beats heared by a passen-
ger on bus will be –
(A) 6 (B) 5 (C) 3 (D) 4
O
50. A sound source is going away from an observer with the sound speed. The apparent
T
frequency which the observer listen
(A) will be half (B) will remains same
E
(C) will be double (D) will not be observed
51. Stationary waves are produced in 10m long streched string. If the string Vibrates in 5
segments and wave velocity 20m/sec, the frequency is-
(A) 10 Hz (B) 5 Hz (C) 4 Hz (D) 2Hz
52. A person is observe two trains one of there is coming with speed of 4m/sec. and another
is going with same speed. If two trains blowing a whistle with frequency 240 Hz. The beat
frequency heard by stationary person will be (speed of sound in air = 320 m/sec.)
(A) zero (B) 3 (C) 6 (D) 12
53. For a wave y = y0sin (t – kx), for what value of  is the maximum particle velocity equal to
two times the wave velocity :-
(A) y0 (B) 2y0 (C) y0/2 (D) 4y0
54. A standing wave having 3 nodes and 2 antinodes is formed between 1.21 Å distance then
the wavelength is %
9
(A) 1.21 Å (B) 2.42 Å (C) 0.605 Å (D) 4.84 Å
55. A set of 56 tuning forks are so arranged in series that each fork gives 4 beats per second
with the previous one the freq. of the last fork is 3 times that of first the freq. of first fork is :
(A) 110 (B) 60 (C) 56 (D) 65
56. A cylindrical tube (L = 120 cm.) is resonant with a tuning fork of frequency 330 Hz. If it is
filling by water then to get resonance minimum length of water column is (Vair = 330 m/s)
(A) 45 cm. (B) 60 cm. (C) 25 cm. (D) 20 cm.
I A
N D
S I
O O
E T
ANSWER KEY EXERCISE - I
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. C C D B C A B B D C C B C D D
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. C C A B A D B B B D A C D B A
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. A A B A C A D B A D C B C B A
A
Que. 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
I
Ans. C D A B A B C A B B B B B C C
Que. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
Ans. B A C D C B C B C C D C D B C
Que.
Ans.
Que.
76
D
91
77
C
92
78
A
93
79
D
94
80
D
95
81
C
96
82
D
97
83
B
98
84
C
99
85
A
N D
100
86
D
101
87
D
102
88
B
103
89
B
104
90
C
105
I
Ans. B C A C A B A D B D A C A A A
Que. 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
Ans. B C C B C D A B C A D B C B B
S
Que. 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135
Ans. A B C C A B C D C C A B C D B
Que. 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150
O
Ans. A A A C B A D D D C C A C C D
Que. 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165
Ans. C B C A D D A C C D D A B C A
O
Que. 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180
Ans. A D B A D A D A C B A C B A B
T
Que. 181 182
Ans. A C
Q u e.
E 1 2 3
ANSWER KEY
4 5 6 7
EXERCISE - II
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A ns . A A C B A A A A A C C A C C C
Q u e. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A ns . D A C D B A D C A B C A C D B
Q u e. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
A ns . B C B A A A A A A B D A B B C
Q u e. 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
A ns . A B C B A B C A A A A
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
CENTRE OF MASS
ETOOSINDIA
CENTRE OF MASS
EXERCISE–I
1. Three identical spheres, each of mass 1 kg are placed touching each other with their
centres on a straight line. Their centre are marked P, Q and R respectively. The distance of
centre of mass of the system from P is :
PQ  PR  QR PQ  PR PQ  QR PR  QR
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 3 3 2
2. A uniform metal disc of radius R is taken and out of it a disc of diameter R is cut off from the
end. The centre of mass of the remaining part will be:
(A) R/4 from the centre (B) R/3 from the centre
I A
D
(C) R/5 from the centre (D) R/6 from the centre
3. A circular plate of uniform thickness has a diameter 56 cm. A circular portion of diameter
portion from the centre of plate will be :
I N
42 cm is removed from one edge as shown in the figure. The centre of mass of the remaining
O O2 O
S
28 cm
21 cm
O2
TO
(A) 5 cm (B) 7 cm (C) 9 cm (D) 11 cm
E
4. Three particles of masses 1 kg, 2 kg and 3 kg are subjected to forces
        
(3 i  2 j 2 k)N, ( i  2 j k)N and (i  j k)N respectively. The magnitude of the
acceleration of the CM of the system is :
11 2 14 2 11 2 22 2
(A) ms (B) ms (C) ms (D) ms
6 6 6 6
  
5. Two bodes of mass 10 kg and 2 kg are moving with velocity 2 i  7 j 3k m/s and
  
10 i  35 j 3k m/s respectively. The velocity of their centre of mass is :
    
(A) 2 i m/s (B) 2 k m/s (C) (2 j 2 k) m/s (D) (2 i  2 j 2 k) m/s
6. The coordinate of the centre of mass of a system as shown in figure :–
Y
solid M
sphere
(0,a)
Y
hollow M M disk
sphere
(0,0) (a,0)
a 
(A)  , 0
3
 a a
(B)  , 
2 2
 a a
(C)  , 
3 3
 a
I A
(D)  0, 
3
D
7. The centre of mass a system of particles does not depend on :
(A) masses of the particles
N
(B) forces on the partices
I
(C) position of the particles
(D) relative distance between the particles
8.
O
(B) In direct ratio of square of masses of particles
(C) In inverse ratio of masses of particles
(D) In direct ratio of masses of particles
S
The centre of mass of a system of two particles divides the distance between them
(A) In inverse ratio of square of masses of particles
TO Q ue. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E
Ans. B D C B B C B C
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
ROTATIONAL
DYNAMICS
ETOOSINDIA
ROTAT I O N A L DY NA M I C S
EXERCISE–I
1. A solid sphere of mass M and radius R rolls on a horizontal surface without slipping. The
ratio of rotational K.E. to total K.E. is :–
(A) 1/2 (B) 3/7 (C) 2/7 (D) 2/10
2. A rigid body is rotating about an axis. To stop the rotation, we have to apply :-
(A) pressure (B) force (C) momentum (D) torque
3. Four particles each of mass m are placed at the corners of a square of side length .The
radius of gyration of the system about an axis perpendicular to the square and passing
through centre is :–
I A
(A)

2
(B)

2
(C) 
N D (D)  2
I
4. A body of mass m is moving with constant velocity parallel to x-axis. The angular momentum
with respect to origin :–
S
(A) increases with time (B) decreases with time
(C) does not change (D) none of above
O
5. The moment of inertia of a rod of mass M and length L about an axis passing through one
edge and perpendicular to its length will be :–
(A) ML2/12 (B) ML2/6 (C) ML2/3 (D) ML2
6.
O
A disc is rolling on an inclined plane without slipping then what fraction of its total energy
T
will be in form of rotational kinetic energy :–
(A) 1 : 3 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 2 : 7 (D) 2 : 5
7.
8.
E
The angular momentum of body remains conserve if :–
(A) applied force on body is zero.
(C) applied force on body is constant.
(B) applied torque on body is zero.
(D) applied torque on body is constant.
A circular disc is to be made by using iron and aluminium so that it acquired maximum
moment of inertia about geometrical axis. It is possible with:
(A) aluminium at interior and iron surrounded to it.
(B) iron at interior and aluminium surrounded to it.
(C) using iron and aluminium layers in alternate order.
(D) sheet of iron is used at both external surface and aluminium sheet as internal layer.
9. If rotational kinetic energy is 50% of total kinetic energy then the body will be :–
(A) ring (B) cylinder (C) hollow sphere (D) solid sphere
10. A person is standing on the edge of a circular platform, which is moving with constant angular
speed about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to the plane of platform. If
person is moving along any radius towards axis of rotation then the angular velocity will :–
(A) decrease (B) remain unchanged
(C) increase (D) data is insufficient
11. A thin circular ring of mass M and radius ‘r’ is rotating about its axis with a constant
angular velocity . Four objects each of mass m, are kept gently to the opposite ends of
A
two perpendicular diameters of the ring. The angular velocity of the ring will be :–
(A)
M
4m
(B)
M
M  4m
(C)
(M  4m)
M
D
12. A solid cylinder of mass M and radius R rolls without slipping down an inclined plane of
(D)
I
(M  4m)
M  4m
N
length L and height h. What is the speed of its centre of mass when the cylinder reaches its
I
bottom :–
3 4
S
(A) 2gh (B) gh (C) gh (D) 4gh
4 3
O
13. A ball rolls without slipping. The radius of gyration of the ball about an axis passing through
its centre of mass is K. If radius of the ball be R, then the fraction of total energy associated
with its rotational energy will be :–
(A)
TO
K2  R2
R2
K2
(B) 2
R
(C) 2
K2
K  R2
(D) 2
R2
K  R2
E
14. The moment of inertia in rotational motion is equivalent to :–
(A) angular velocity of linear motion (B) mass of linear motion
(C) frequency of linear motion (D) current
15. Two rods each of mass m and length  are joined at the centre to form a cross. The moment
of inertia of this cross about an axis passing through the common centre of the rods and
perpendicular to the plane formed by them, is :–
(A) m2/12 (B) m2/6 (C) m2/3 (D) m2/2
16. A wheel has moment of inertia 5 × 10–3 kg m2 and is making 20 rev/sec. The torque
needed to stop it in 10 sec is ............. × 10–2 N-m :–
(A) 2 (B) 2.5 (C) 4 (D) 4.5
17. The ratio of the radii of gyration of a circular disc about a tangential axis in the plane of the
disc and of a circular ring of the same radius about a tangential axis in the plane of the ring
is :–
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 5: 6 (C) 2 : 3 (D) 1: 2
18. A round disc of moment of inertia I2 about its axis perpendicular to its plane and passing
through its centre is placed over another disc of moment of inertia I1 rotating with an angular
velocity  about the same axis. The final angular velocity of the combination of discs is :–
I1 (I1  I2 )  I 2
(A)  (B) I  I (C) I1 (D) I  I
A
1 2 1 2
19. Three particles, each of mass m are situated at the vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC
of side  (as shown in the figure). The moment of inertia of the system about a line AX
perpendicular to AB and in the plane of ABC, will be:
X m C
D I
m

I

m
N
S
A B
(A) 2 m2 (B) 5/4 m2 (C) 3/2 m2 (D) 3/4 m2
be:–
O
20. A wheel having moment of inertia 2 kg–m2 about its vertical axis, rotates at the rate of 60
rpm about the axis. The torque which can stop the wheel’s rotation in one minute would
O
(A) /12 N–m (B) /15 N–m (C) /18 N–m (D) 2/15 N–m
E T
21. In an orbital motion, the angular momentum vector is :–
(A) along the radius vector
(C) in the orbital plane
(B) parallel to the linear momentum
(D) perpendicular to the orbital plane
22. A solid cylinder of mass 20kg has length 1 m and radius 0.2 m. Then its moment of inertia
(in kg-m2) about its geometrical axis is :–
(A) 0.8 kg-m2 (B) 0.4 kg-m2 (C) 0.2 kg-m2 (D) 20.2 kg-m2
23. A constant torque acting on a uniform circular wheel changes its angular momentum from
A0 to 4 A0 in 4 seconds. The magnitude of this torque is :–
(A) 3A0/4 (B) A0 (C) 4A0 (D) 12 A0
24. A dancer is standing on a rotating platform taking two sphere on her hands. If she drops
down the sphere on ground, then dancer’s :
(A) angular velocity will increase
(B) angular momentum & angular velocity both will unchange
(C) angular momentum unchanged & angular velocity will increase
(D) both will decrease
25. Rate of change of angular momentum with respect to time is proportional to :–
(A) angular velocity (B) angular acceleration
(C) moment of inertia (D) torque
26. Two bodies have their moments of inertia I and 2I respectively about their axis of rotation.
A
If their kinetic energies of rotation are equal, their angular momentum will be in the ratio :–
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 :1 (C) 1: 2
D
(D) 2 : 1
27. A horizontal platform is rotating with uniform angular velocity around the vertical axis passing
through its centre. At some instant of time a viscous fluid of mass ‘‘m’’ is dropped at the
I
N
centre and is allowed to spread out and finally fall on ground. The angular velocity during
I
this period :–
(A) decreases continuosly (B) decreases initially and increases again
(C) remains unaltered (D) Increases continously
28. Moment of inertia :–
O
(A) is a vector quantity
(C) is a tensor quantity S (B) is a scalar quantity
(D) can not be calculate
O
29. When constant torque is acting on a body then :–
(A) body maintain its state or moves in straight line with same velocity
T
(B) acquire linear acceleration
(C) acquire angular acceleration
(D) rotates with a constant angular velocity
E
30. The moment of inertia of a circular ring (radius R, mass M) about an axis which passes
through tangentially and perpendicular to its plane will be:–
(A) MR2/2 (B) MR2 (C) 3/2 MR2
31. If torque on a body is zero, then which is conserved:

(D) 2MR2
(A) force (B) linear momentum

(C) angular momentum (D) angular impulse
32. A body of mass 10 kg and radius of gyration 0.1 m is rotating about an axis. If angular speed is
10 rad/s, then angular momentum will be :–
(A) 1 kg m2/s (B) 0.1 kg m2/s (C) 100 kg m2/s (D) 10 kg m2/s
33. Two bodies A and B having same angular momentum and IA > IB, then the relation between
(K.E.)A and (K.E.)B will be :–
(A) (K.E.)A > (K.E.)B (B) (K.E.)A = (K.E.)B (C) (K.E.)A < (K.E.)B (D) (K.E.)A  (K.E.)B
34. If I = 50 kg-m2, then how much torque will be applied to stop it in 10 sec. Its initial angular
speed is 20 rad/sec. :–
(A) 100 N-m (B) 150 N-m (C) 200 N-m (D) 250 N-m
35. A uniform rod AB of length  and mass m is free to rotate about A. The rod is released from
rest in the horizontal position. Given that the moment of inertia of the rod about A is m2/3,
the initial angular acceleration of the rod will be :–
A

B
I A
(A) 3g/2 (B) 2g/3 (C) mg

2
N D (D)
3
2
g
36. What is the moment of inertia of ring about its diameter ?

(A) MR2 (B) MR2/2 (C) 3/4 MR2
S I (D) 5/4 MR2
37. A sphere and a disc of same radii and mass are rolling on an inclined plane without slipping.
as & ad are acceleration and g is acceleration due to gravity. Then which statement is
correct ?
O O
(A) as > ad > g (B) g > as > ad (C) as > g > ad (D) ad > as > g
38. Four identical thin rods each of mass M and length , form a square frame. Moment of
T
inertia of this frame about an axis through the centre of the square and perpendicular to its
plane is :-
(A) 1/3 M2 (B) 4/3 M2 (C) 2/3 M2 (D) 13/3 M2
E
(A) r    0 and F   0
   
 
39. If F is the force acting on a particle having position vector r and  be the torque of this
force about the origin, then :-
     
 
 
(B) r    0 and F   0
 
(C) r    0 and F   0 (D) r    0 and F   0
40. A thin circular ring of mass M and radius R is rotating in a horizontal plane about an axis
vertical to its plane with a constant angular velocity . If two objects each of mass m be
attached gently to the opposite ends of a diameter of the ring, the ring will then rotate with
an angular velocity :-
(A) M/M+m (B) (M – 2m)/M+2m (C) M/M+2m (D)(M + 2m)/M
41. Which of the following bodies of same mass and same radius has minimum moment of
inertia ?
(A) Ring (B) Disc (C) Hollow sphere (D) Solid sphere
42. A uniform thin ring of mass 0.4 kg rolls without slipping on a horizontal surface with a linear
velocity of 10 cm/s. The kinetic energy of the ring is
(A) 4 × 10–3 joules (B) 4 × 10–2 joules (C) 2 × 10–3 joules (D) 2 × 10–2 joules
43. A body is rotating with angular momentum L. If I is its moment of inertia about the axis of
rotation, its kinetic energy of rotation is
(A) 1/2 IL2 (B) 1/2 IL (C) 1/2 (I 2/L) (D) 1/2 · L2/I
44. The instantaneous angular position of a point on a rotating wheel is given by the equation
 (t) = 2t3 – 6t2 . The torque on the wheel becomes zero at :-
I A
D
(A) t = 1s (B) t = 0.5 s (C) t = 0.25 s (D) t = 2s
45. The moment of inertia of a thin uniform rod of mass M and length L about an axis passing
N
through its midpoint and perpendicular to its length is I0. Its moment of inertia about an axis
I
passing through one of its ends and perpendicular to its length is :-
(A) I0 + ML2/2 (B) I0 + ML2/4 (C) I0 + 2ML2 (D) I0 + ML2
S
46. A small mass attached to a string rotates on a frictionless table top as shown. If the tension
in the string is increased by pulling the string cauusing the radius of the circular motion to
O
decrease by a factor of 2, the kinetic energy of the mass will :-
O
r
E T
(A) Decrease by a factor of 2
(C) Increase by a factor of 2
(B) Remain constant
(D) Increase by a factor of 4
47. When a mass is rotating in a plane about a fixed point, its angular momentum is directed
along :-
(A) the radius
(B) the tangent to the orbit
(C) a line perpendicular to the plane of rotation
(D) the line making an angle of 45° to the plane of rotation.
48. A solid cylinder of mass 3 kg is rolling on a horizontal surface with velocity 4 ms–1. It collides
with a horizontal spring of force constant 200 Nm–1. The maximum compression produced
in the spring will be :
(A) 0.7 m (B) 0.2 m (C) 0.5 m (D) 0.6 m
49. The moment of inertia of a uniform circular disc is maximum about an axis perpendicular
to the disc and passing through:
C
D
B
A
(A) D (B) A (C) B (D) C
50. A circular platform is mounted on a frictionless vertical axle. Its radius R = 2m and its
moment of inertia about the axle is 200 kg m2. It is initially at rest. A 50 kg man stands on
the edge of the platform and begins to walk along the edge at the speed of 1 ms–1 relative
to the ground.Time taken by the man to complete one revolution is :-
I A
D
(A) 2 s (B) /2 s (C)  s (D) 3/2 s
N
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
I
Ans. C D A C B A B A A C B C C B B
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. A B B B B D B A C D C B C C D
S
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. C A C A A B B B D C D A D B B
Que. 46 47 48 49 50
O
Ans. D C D C A
TO
E
EXERCISE-II
1. The moment of inertia of a body about a given axis of rotation depends upon :-
(A) the distribution of mass
(B) distance of particle of body from the axis of rotation
(C) shape of the body (D) all of the above
2. Two rotating bodies have same angular momentum but their moments of inertia are I1 and
I2 respectively (I1>I2). Which body will have higher kinetic energy of rotation :-
(A) first
(B) second
(C) both will have same kinetic energy
3.
(D) not possible to predict
A fly wheel is so constructed that almost whole of its mass is concentrated at its rim,
I A
D
because:-
(A) it increases the moment of inertia of the fly-wheel
(B) it decreases the moment of inertia of the fly-wheel
(C) it increases the speed of the fly-wheel
(D) it increases the power of the fly-wheel
I N
S
4. A stone attached to one end of string is revolved around a stick so that the string winds
upon the stick and gets shortened. What is conserved ?
(A) angular momentum (B) linear momentum
5.
O O
(C) kinetic energy (D) none of the above
The graph between the angular momentum J and angular velocity  will be :-
6.
(A)
E T J

(B) J
Which of the following pairs do not match :-

(A) rotational power–Joule/sec
(C) J
(B) torque-Newton meter


(D) J
(C) angular displacement-radian (D) angular acceleration - radian/sec
7. The linear and angular acceleration of a particle are 10 m/sec2 and 5 rad/sec2 respectively.
It will be at a distance from the axis of rotation.
(A) 50 m (B) 1/2 m (C) 1 m (D) 2 m
8. A thin rod of length L is suspended from one end and rotated with n rotations per second.
The rotational kinetic energy of the rod will be :
(A) 2mL22n2 (B) 1/2 mL22n2 (C) 2/3 mL22n2 (D) 1/6 mL22n2
9. The grinding stone of a flour mill is rotating at 600 rad/sec. for this power of 1.2 k watt is
used. the effective torque on stone in N–m will be :–
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
10. A rotating table completes one rotation is 10 sec. and its moment of ineratia is 100 kg-m2.
A person of 50 kg. mass stands at the centre of the rotating table. If the person moves 2m.
from the centre, the angular velocity of the rotating table in rad/sec. will be:
(A) 2/30 (B) 20/30 (C) 2/3 (D) 2
11. The moment of inertia of a solid cylinder about its own axis is the same as its moment of
inertia about an axis passing through its centre of gravity and perpendicular to its length.
A
The relation between its length L and radius R is
(A) L  2 R (B) L  3 R (C) L = 3R
D
(D) L = R
12. All the particles of a rigid rotating body move in a circular path when the axis of rotation:-
(A) passes through any point in the body (B) is situated outside the body
I
N
(C) situated any where (D) passes through the centre of mass
13. On account of the earth rotating about its axis :-
S I
(A) the linear velocity of objects at equator is greater than at other places
(B) the angular velocity of objects at equator is more than that of objects at poles
(C) the linear velocity of objects at all places at the earth is equal, but angular velocity is different
O
(D) at all places the angular velocity and linear velocity are uniform
14. On meltng of ice on the pole of the earth, its moment of inertia will :-
O
(A) increase (B) decrease
(C) remain unchanged (D) none of these
E
because
T
15. The wheels of moving vehicles are made hollow in the middle and thick at the periphery,
(A) it gives minimum moment of ineretia to the tyre

(B) its shape is a strong one
(C) this increases the speed (D) it increases moment of inertia of tyre
16. A ring and a solid sphere of same mass and radius are rotating with the same angular
velocity about their diameteric axes then :-
(A) it is easier to stop the ring (B) it is easier to stop the solid sphere
(C) it is equally difficult to stop both of them (D) it is not possible to stop a rotating body
17. For rotational motion, the Newton's second law of motion is indicated by :-
 
 dp  dJ  
(A)  (B) F  (C)   (D) F12  F21
dt dt
18. Four similar point masses (each of mass m) are placed on the circumference of a disc of
mass M and radius R. The M.I. of the system about the normal axis through the centre O
will be:-
(A) MR2 + 4mR2 (B) 1/2 MR2 + 4mR2 (C) MR2 + 8/5 mR2 (D) none of these
19. By the theorem of perpendicular axes, if a body be in X-Z-plane then :-

(A) x – y = z (B) x + z = y (C) x + y = z (D) y + z = x
I A
along the diameter, for which of the following body :-
(A) sphere (B) disc (C) ring
N D
20. The theorem of perpendicular axes is not applicable for determination of moment of inertia
(D) blade
S I
21. The axis X and Z in the plane of a disc are mutually perpendicular and Y-axis is perpendicular
to the plane of the disc. If the moment of inertia of the body about X and Y axes is respectively
30 kg m2 and 40 kg m2 then M.I. about Z-axis in kg m2 will be :-
(A) 70 (B) 50 (C) 10 (D) Zero
O
22. A solid sphere and a hollow sphere of the same mass have the same M.I. about their
respective diameters. The ratio of their radii will be :-
O
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 3: 5 (C) 5: 3 (D) 5 : 4
T
23. Three solid spheres of mass M and radius R are shown in
the figure. The moment of inertia of the system about XX'
E
axis will be :-
(A) 7/2 MR2
(C) 16/5 MR2
(B) 14/5 MR2
(D) 21/5 MR2
X
X'
24. The moment of inertia of a square lamina about the perpendicular axis through its centre
of mass is 20 kg-m2. Then, its moment of inertia about an axis touching its side and in the
plane of the lamina will be :-
(A) 10 kg-m2 (B) 30 kg-m2 (C) 40 kg-m2 (D) 25 kg-m2
25. If the earth loses its atmosphere sudenly, then the duration of day will :-
(C) remain unchanged (D) nothing can be definitely said
26. The rotational kinetic energy of a body is E. In the absence of external torque, if mass of
the body is halved and radius of gyration doubled, then its rotational kinetic energy will be-
(A) 0.5E (B) 0.25E (C) E (D) 2E
27. A ring is rolling without slipping. Its energy of translation is E. Its total kinetic energy will be
:-
(A) E (B) 2E (C) 3E (D) 4E
28. A disc rolls down a plane of length L and inclined at angle , without slipping. Its velocity on
reaching the bottom will be :-
A
4gL sin  2gL sin  10gL sin 
(A) (B) (C) (D)
I
4gLsin 
3 3 7
D
29. A spherical shell and a solid cylinder of same radius rolls down an inclined plane. The ratio
of their accelerations will be:-
(A) 15:14 (B) 9:10 (C) 2:3 (D) 3:5
I N
30. A ring takes time t1 and t2 for sliding down and rolling down an inclined plane of length L
respectively for reaching the bottom. The ratio of t1 and t2 is :-
S
(A) 2 :1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
O
31. In the fig. (a) half of the meter scale is made of wood while the other half of steel. The
wooden part is pivoted at O. A force F is applied at the end of steel part. In figure (b) the
steel part is pivoted at O' and the same force is applied at the wooden end:-
TO wood
(a)
steel
F
steel
O'
(b)
wood
P'
E
(A) more angular acceleration will be produced in (a)
(B) more angular acceleration will be produced in (b)
(C) same angular acceleration will be produced in both conditions
(D) information is incomplete
32. The moment of inertia of a disc of radius 0.5 m about its geometric axis is 2kg-m2. If a
string is tied to its circumference and a force of 10 Newton is applied, the value of torque
with respect to this axis will be :-
(A) 2.5 N-m (B) 5 N-m (C) 10 N-m (D) 20 N-m
33. In the above question, if the disc executes rotatory motion, its angular acceleration will be:-
(A) 2.5 rad/sec2 (B) 5 rad/sec2 (C) 10 rad/sec2 (D) 20 rad/sec2
34. In the above question, the value of its angular velocity after 2 seconds will be :-
(A) 2.5 rad/sec (B) 5 rad/sec (C) 10 rad/sec (D) 20 rad/sec
35. In the above question, the change in angular momentum of disc in first 2 seconds in Nm
second will be –
(A) 2.5 (B) 5 (C) 10 (D) 20
36. The maximum and minimum distance of a comet from the sun are 14 × 109m and 7× 107m
respectively. If the maximum velocity of the comet is 6 × 102 km/sec, its minimum velcity
will be:-
(A) 3 km/sec (B) 4 km/sec (C) 6 km/sec (D) 8 km/sec
A
37. A solid sphere is rolling down on inclined plane from rest and a rectangular block of same
mass is also slipping down simultaneously from rest on the same plane. Then-
(A) both of them will reach the bottom simultaneously
(B) the sphere will reach the bottom first
(C) the rectangular block will reach the bottom first.
(D) depends on density of material
D I
I N
38. The M.I. of a thin rod of length  about the perpendicular axis through its centre is I. The M.I.
of the square structure made by four such rods about a perpendicular axis to the plane and
S
through the centre will be :-
(A) 4I (B) 8I (C) 12I (D) 16I
O
39. A wheel is rotating about its axis at a constant angular velocity. If suddenly an object sticks
to it on the rim, then its M.I. will :-
TO
(C) remain unchanged (D) nothing can be said
40. In the above question, the angular velocity will :–

(A) increase (B) decrease (C) not change (D) nothing can be said
E
41. An ant is sitting at the edge of a rotating disc. If the ant reaches the other end, after moving
along the diameter, the angular velocity of the disc will:-
(A) remain constant
(C) first increases, then decrease
(B) first decreases and then increases
(D) Iincrease continuously
42. The moment of inertia of a ring of mass M and radius R about PQ axis will be :-
(A) MR2 D P
M
MR 2
(B) R
2 O O'
3
(C) MR2
2
D' Q
(D) 2MR
43. The moment of inertia of a thin square plate ABCD of uniform thickness about an axis
passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane will be :-
(A) I1 + I2 I4 I1
A B
(B) I1 – I3
I3
(C) I1 + I2 + I4 O
D C
(D) I1 + I2 + I3 I2
44. When a mass is rotating in a plane about a fixed point, its angular momentum is directed
along
A
(A) the radius
I
(B) the tangent to orbit
(C) line at an angle of 45° to the plane of rotation
(D) the axis of rotation
N D
45. A ring of mass 10 kg and diameter 0.4 meter is rotating about its geometrical axis at 1200
rotations per minute. Its moment of inertia and angular momentum will be respectively:-
I
(A) 0.4 kg-m2 and 50.28 Joule-sec (B) 0.4 kg-m2 and 0.4 Joule-sec
(C) 50.28 kg-m2 and 0.4 Joule sec (D) 0.4 kg-m2 and zero
same. The ratio of their angular momentum is :-

(A) 3:1
O
(B) 1:3 (C) 9:1
S
46. The rotational kinetic energy of two bodies of moments of ineritia 9 kg-m2 and 1kg-m2 are
(D) 1:9
47. Four point masses (each of mass m) are arranged it the X-Y plane the moment of inertia of
O
this array of masses about Y-axis is
(A) ma2 Y
T
a (a,a)
(B) 2ma2 (2a,0)
a
(C) 4ma2 O a X
(0,0)
E
a
(D) 6ma2 (a,–a)
48. Which of the following has the highest moment of inertia when each of them has the same
mass and the same radius ?
(A) a hollow sphere about one of its diameters
(B) a solid sphere about one of its diameters
(C) a disc about its central axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc
(D) a ring about its central axis perpendicular to the plane of the ring.
49. If the radius of gyration of a solid disc of mass 10 kg about an axis is 0.40 m, then the
moment of inertia of the disc about that axis is
(A) 1.6 kg m2 (B) 3.2 kg m2 (C) 6.4 kg m2 (D) 9.5 kg m2.
50. A particle of mass m and radius of gyration K is rotating with an angular acceleration .
The torque acting on the particle is
(A) 1/2 m K2  (B) mK2 (C) mK2/ (D) 1/4 m K2 
51. A thin hollow cylinder open at both ends slides without rotating and then rolls without slipping
with the same speed. The ratio of the kinetic energies in the two cases is
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 4
52. Calculate the ratio of the times taken by a uniform solid sphere and a disc of the same
mass and the same diameter to roll down through the same distance from rest on a smooth
inclined plane.
(A) 15 : 14 (B) 15 : 14 (C) 152 : 142
I A
(D) 14 : 15
53. A particle of mass m is rotating in a plane in a circular path of radius r. Its angular momentum
is L. The centripetal force acting on the particle is
(A) L2/mr (B) L2m/r (C) L2/mr2
N D
(D) L2/mr3
I
54. A dancer on ice spins faster, when she folds her arms. This is due to
(A) increase in energy and increase in angular momentum
(B) decrease in friction at the skates
O S
(C) constant angular momentum and increase in kinetic energy
(D) increase in kinetic energy and decrease in angular momentum.
55. The quantity not involved directly in rotational motion of the body is
(A) moment of inertia (B) torque
O
(C) angular velocity (D) mass
T
56. A particle of mass m is describing a circular path of radius r with uniform speed. If L is the
angular momentum of the particle (about the axis of the circle), then the kinetic energy of the
E
particle is
(A) L2/mr2 (B) mr2L (C) L2/2mr2 (D) L2r2/m
57. When a sphere of moment of inertia I rolls down on an inclined plane the percentage of
total energy which is rotational, is approximately
(A) 28 % (B) 72 % (C) 100 % (D) none of these
58. A particle performs uniform circular motion with an angular momentum L. If the frequency
of particle's motion is doubled and its kinetic energy halved, the angular momentum
becomes
(A) 2L (B) 4L (C) L/2 (D) L/4
59. A flywheel is making 3000/ revolutions per minute about its axis. If the moment of inertia
of the flywheel about that axis is 400 kgm2, its rotational kinetic energy is
(A) 2 × 106 J (B) 3 × 103 J (C) 5002 J (D) 12 × 103 J
60. Three thin uniform rods each of mass M and length L are placed along the three axis of a
cartesian coordinate system with one end of each rod at the origin. The M. I. of the system
about z-axis is
(A) ML2/3 (B) 2ML2/3 (C) ML2/6 (D) ML2
61. When a body starts to roll on an inclined plane, its potential energy is converted into
(A) translational kinetic energy only (B) translational and rotational kinetic energy
(C) rotational energy only (D) none
A
2
62. A fan of moment of inertia 0.6 kg-m is running by a working speed of 0.5 rev. per sec.
I
Indicate the correct value of angular momentum of the fan.
   2 m2 kg -m2
 kg -m /s (C) 3kg (D) 0.6
D
(A)  (B) 6 kg m2/s
0.6  s s
N
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
I
Ans. D B A A A D D C B A B B A A D
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. B C B B A C C C C B A B A B B
S
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. B B A B C A C D A B C C A D A
Que. 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
O
Ans. A D D A B B D D C D C A D A B
Que. 61 62
Ans. B D
TO
E
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
FLUID MECHANICS
ETOOSINDIA
FLUID MECHANICS
EXERCISE–I
HYDRO STATICS
1. When a large bubble rises from the bottom of a lake to the surface, its radius doubles. If
atmospheric pressure is equal to that of column of water height H, then the depth of lake
is :
(A) H (B) 2H (C) 7H (D) 8H
2. A sample of metal weights 210 gram in air, 180 gram in water and 120 gram in an unknown
liquid. Then
(A) the density of metal is 3 g/cm3
I A
D
(B) the density of metal is 7 g/cm3
(C) density of metal is 4 times the density of the unknown liquid
N
(D) the metal will float in water
3.
(A) 5 cm (B) 10 cm
S
(C) 15 cm
I
A wooden cube just floats inside water when a 200 g mass is placed on it. When the mass
is removed the cube is 2 cm above water level. The side of cube is
(D) 20 cm
O
4. 'Torr' is the unit of :-
(A) Pressure (B) Density (C) Volume (D) Flux
O
5. A sphere is floating in water its 1/3rd part is outside the water and when sphere is floating
in unknown liquid, its 3/4th part is outside the liquid then density of liquid is
T
(A) 4/9 gm/c.c. (B) 9/4 gm/c.c. (C) 8/3 gm/c.c. (D) 3/8 gm/c.c.
6. Which of the following works on Pascal's law ?
7. E
(A) Sprayer
(C) Hydraulic lift
(B) Venturimeter
(D) Aneroid barometer
An object of weight W and density  is submerged in a fluid of density 1. Its appearent
weight will be
( 1 )  1 
(A) W( – 1) (B) (C) W  1   (D) W(1 – )
W  
8. Water stands upto a height h behind the vertical wall of a dam. What is the net horizontal
force pushing the dam down by the stream, if width of the dam is ? ( = density of water)
h 2g h 2g hg

(A) 2hg (B) (C) (D)
2 4 4
9. A U-tube is partially filled with water. Oil which does not mix with water is next poured into
one side, until water rises by 25 cm on the other side. If the density of the oil is 0.8 g/cc, the
oil level will stand higher than the water level by
(A) 6.25 cm (B) 12.50 cm (C) 18.75 cm (D) 25.00
A
10. Which law states that the magnitude of pressure within fluid is equal in all parts ?
I
(A) Pascal's law (B) Gay-Lusac's law (C) Dalton's law (D) None of these
11. A body measures 5 N in air and 2 N when put in water. The buoyant force is
(A) 7 N (B) 9 N
12. Hydraulic press is based upon

(C) 3 N
D
(D) None of these
N
I
(A) Archimede's principle (B) Bernoulli's theorem
(C) Pascal's law (D) Reynold's number
O
(A) Constant acceleration
(C) Constant velocity
S
13. A wooden block is taken to the bottom of a lake of water and then released. it rise up with
(B) Decreasing acceleration

(D) Decreasing velocity
O
14. A candle of diameter d is floating on a liquid in a cylindrical container of diameter D (D >>d)
as shown in figure. If it is burning at the rate of 2 cm/hour then the top of the candle will –
T
(A) remain at the same height
E
(B) fall at the rate of 1 cm/hour
(C) fall at the rate of 2 cm/hour
(D) go up at the rate of 1 cm/hour
15. By sucking through a straw, a student can reduce the pressure in his lungs to 750 mm of
Hg (density = 13·6 gm/cm3). Using the straw, he can drink water from a glas upto a maximum
depth of
(A) 10 cm (B) 75 cm (C) 13·6 cm (D) 1·36 cm
HYDRO DYNAMICS
16. An incompressible fluid flows steadily through a cylindrical pipe which has radius 2 R at
point A and radius R at point B farther along the flow direction. If the velocity at point A is v,
its velocity at point B is
(A) 2v (B) v (C) v/2 (D) 4v
17. Water is flowing through a non-uniform radius tube. If ratio of the radius of entry and exit
end of the pipe is 3 : 2 then the ratio of velocities of entring and exit liquid is :-
(A) 4 : 9 (B) 9 : 4 (C) 8 : 27 (D) 1 : 1
18. An aeroplane of mass 3 × 104 kg and total wing area of 120 m2 is in a level flight at some
height. The difference in pressure between the upper and lower surfaces of its wings in
kilopascals is (g=10m/s2 )
(A) 2.5 (B) 5.0 (C) 10.0 (D) 12.5
I A
(1 atm = 105 N m–2 ), then velocity of water flowing from hole is
N D
19. A hole is there in the bottom of the tank having water. If total pressure at bottom is 3 atm
I
(A) 400 ms 1 (B) 600 ms 1 (C) 60 ms 1 (D) none of these
S
20. Scent sprayer is based on
(A) Charle's law (B) Archimede's principle
(C) Boyle's law (D) Bernoulli's theorem
O O
21. Bernoulli's equation for steady, non-viscous, in-compressible flow expresses the
(A) Conservation of angular momentum
(C) Conservation of momentum
(B) Conservation of density
(D) Conservation of energy.
T
22. Application of Bernoulli's theorem can be seen in
(A) Dynamic lift to aeroplane (B) Hydraulic press
E
(C) Helicopter (D) None of these
23. The velocity of water flowing in a non-uniform tube is 20 cm/s at a point where the tube
radius is 0.2 cm. The velocity at another point, where the radius is 0.1 cm is
(A) 80cm/s (B) 40cm/s (C) 20cm/s (D) 5cm/s
VISCOSITY
24. Speed of 2 cm radius ball in a viscous liquid is 20 cm s–1. Then the speed of 1 cm radius
ball in the same liquid is
(A) 5 cm/s (B) 10 cm/s (C) 40 cm/s (D) 80 cm/s
25. The velocity of falling rain drop attain limited value because of
(A) surface tension (B) upthrust due to air
(C) viscous force exerted by air (D) air current
26. Poise is the unit of

(A) Pressure (B) Friction (C) Surface tension (D) Viscosity
27. Two rain drops falling through air have radii in the ratio 1:2. They will have terminal velocity
in the ratio.
I A
D
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 1 : 4 (C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 2
28. A sphere of mass M and radius R is falling in a viscous fluid. The terminal velocity attained
N
by the falling object will be proportional to
I
(A) R2 (B) R (C) 1/R (D) 1/R2
S
29. A drop of water of radius 0.0015 mm is falling in air. If the coefficient of viscosity of air is
2.0 × 10–5 kg / (m-s), the terminal velocity of the drop will be
(The density of water = 1.0 × 103 kg/m3 and g = 10 m/s2)
O
(A) 1.0 × 10–4 m/s (B) 2.0 × 10–4 m/s (C) 2.5 × 10–4 m/s (D) 5.0 × 10–4 m/s
30. A spherical body of diameter 'D' is falling in viscous medium. Its terminal velocity vt is
Q ue. 1
TO
proportional to :-
(A) vt  D1/2
2
(B) vt  D3/2
3 4 5
(C) vt  D2
6 7 8
(D) vt  D5/2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
E
Ans. C B B A C C C B B A C C A B C
Q ue. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. D A A A D B A A A C D B A C C
EXERCISE–II
1. A piece of ice is floating in a jar containing water. When the ice melts, the temperature of
water falls from 40 C to 10 C. Then the level of water :-
(A) Rises (B) Falls
(C) Remains unchanged (D) Changes erratically
2. The spring balance A read 2 kg. with a block m suspended from it. A balance B reads 5 kg.
when a beaker with liquid is put on the pan of the balance. The two balances are now so
arranged that the hanging mass is inside the liquid in the beaker as shown in fig. In this
situation :–
I A
m
B
N D
(A) The balance A will read more than 2 kg.
(B) The balance B will read more than 5 kg.
S I
(C) The balance A will read less than 2 kg. and B will read more than 5 kg.
O
(D) The balance A and B will read 2 kg. and 5 kg. respectively.
3. Two vessels A and B have the same base area and contain water to the same height, but
O
the mass of water in A is four times that in B. The ratio of the liquid thrust at the base of A to
that at the base of B is :-
T
E 
A

B
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 1 : 1 (D) 16 : 1
4. A wooden ball of density D is immersed in water of density d to a depth h below the

surface of water. Upto which height the ball will jump out of water, when it is released ?
d d 
(A) h (B)   1 h (C) h (D) Zero
D D
5. A cylinder is filled with a liquid of density d upto a height h. If the beaker is at rest, then the
mean pressure on the wall is :-
(A) Zero (B) hdg (C) h/2 dg (D) 2 hdg
6. If the density of a block is 981 kg/m3 then it shall

(A) Sink in water
(B) float with some part emmersed in water
(C) float completely immersed in watere
(D) float completely out of water.
A
7. A boat having a length of 3 metre and breadth 2 metre is floating on a lake. The boat sinks
8.
by one cm when a man gets on it. The mass of the man is
(A) 60 kg (B) 62 kg (C) 72 kg (D) 128 kg
D
A tank of height 5 m is full of water. There is a hole of cross sectional area 1 cm2 in its
bottom. The initial volume of water that will come out from this hole per second is
I
N
(A) 10–3 m3/s (B) 10–4 m3/s (C) 10 m3/s (D) 10–2 m3/s.
9.
S I
The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has a radius R, one end of which has n fine holes,
each of radius r. If the speed of flow of the liquid in the tube is v, the speed of ejection of the
liquid through the hole is :
O
1 3 2
v  R v R 2
v R 2
v R
(A)   (B)   (C)   (D)  
n r n r  n r  n r 
O
10. Two water pipes P and Q having diameter 2 × 10–2 m and 4 × 10–2 m respectively are
joined in series with the main supply line of water. The velocity of water flowing in pipe P is
T
(A) 4 times that of Q
(C) 1/2 times that of Q
(B) times that of Q
(D) 1/4 times that of Q
11.
E
The flow speeds of air on the lower and upper surfaces of the wing of an aeroplane arev
and 2 vrespectively. The density of air is  and surface area of wing is A. The dynamic liftt
on the wing is :
(A) v2A (B) 2
2 v A (C) (1/2) v2A (D) 2v2A
12. A small drop of water falls from rest through a large height h in air. The final velocity is
(A) almost independent of h (B) proportional to h
(C) proportional to h (D) inversely proportional to h
13. A small ball is left in a viscous liquid form very much height. Correct graph of its velocity
with time is :
B
A
velocity
C
D
time
(A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D
14. A ball rises to surface at a constant velocity in liquid whose density is 4 times greater than
that of the material of the ball. The ratio of the force of friction acting on the rising ball and
I A
D
its weight is :
(A) 3 : 1 (B) 4 : 1 (C) 1 : 3 (D) 1 : 4
N
15. Two drops of equal radius are falling through air with a steady velocity of 5cm/sec. If the
I
two drops coalesce, then its terminal velocity will be –
1 1 2
(A) 4 3  5 cm / Sec. (B) 4 13 cm/Sec. (C) 5 3  4 cm / Sec. (D) 4 3  5 cm / Sec.
Q ue.
Ans.
1
A
O
2
C
3
C
4
B
5
C
6
B
7
A
S 8
A
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
D A C A C A A
TO
E
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
THERMODYNAMICS
ETOOSINDIA
THERMODYNAMICS
EXERCISE–I
1. On mixing 1 gm mole of a monoatomic with 1 gm mole of a diatomic gas the specific heat
of mixture at constant volume will be :–
(A) R (B) 3/2 R (C) 2R (D) 5/2R
2. At what temperature does the temperature in Celsius and Fahrenheit equalise

(A) –40° (B) 40° (C) 36.6° (D) 38°
3. The first law of thermodynamics is :–

(A) Law of conservation of energy
(B) Law of conservation of mechanical energy
I A
D
(C) Law of conservation of gravitational p.E.
4.
will be :
373  250 275  250
N
The efficienty of a Carnot engine operating with reservoir tempeture of 100°C and –23°C
I 100  23 373  123
S
(A) (B) (C) (D)
373 373 100 100
O
5. Pressure-temperature relationship for an ideal gas undergoing adiabatic change is ( = Cp/
Cv)
(A) PT = constant (B) PT -1 + = constant
O
(C) P - 1 T = constant (D) P1-  T = constant
T
6. An inventor claims that when temperatures of source and sink are 127° C and 27° C
respectively then efficiency of engine is 26%, then :–
E
(A) It is impossible (B) It in possible but possibility is less
(C) It's possibility is high (D) Data is insufficient
7. The initial volume and pressure of a gas are V and P respectively. It is expanded through
two different processes such that the final volume becomes 2V in each case. If the amount
of work done in isothermal process is W 1 and that in adiabatic process is W 2, then :-
(A) W 1 > W 2 (B) W 1 < W 2
(C) W 1 = W 2 (D) Nothing can be stated
8. The value of internal energy in an adiabatic process :-

(A) Remains unchanged (B) Only increases
(C) Only diminishes
(D) May diminish and may also increase
9. In the given graph the isothermal curves are :-
P
A
B
D C
V
(A) AB and CD (B) AB and AD (C) AD and BC (D) BC and CD
10. In the above question, the curve for which the heat is absorbed from the surroundings is :–
11.
(A) AB (B) BC (C) CD (D) DA
If H calories are generated on doing work W0, and if by H calories, amount of work done is
I A
D
W, which of the following is the correct relation :
(A) W 0/H = constant (B) W/H = constant (C) W 0H = constant (D) None of the above
12.
N
Cp and Cv are the specific heats of 1 gm mole of a gas constant pressure and constant
I
volume respectively. The ratio of adiabatic and isothermal elasticities will be -
(A) Cp/Cv (B) Cv/Cp (C) CpCv (D) (Cp - Cv)/Cv
13.
O
(A) - 50 J (B) 20 J S
If energy given to a system is 35 joules and the work done by the system is 15 joules, the
change in the intenal enengry of the system is :
(C) 30 J (D) 50 J
O
14. A gas at 50 N/m2 pressure is compressed from 10m3 to 4m3 under constant pressure.
subsequently it is given 100 J of heat. The internal energy of the gas will be :
T
(A) Increased by 100 J (B) Decreased by 200 J
(C) Increased by 400 J (D) Increased by 200 J
15.
E
A gas at intial temperature 27°C is adiabatic cally compressed so that its volume becomes
1/9 of the previous one. If  =1.5 the final temperature be:
(A) 657 K
16. The correct formula is :

(A) Cv = (R -1) 
(B) 6270 C
(B) Cv = R/( – 1)
(C) 5430 C (D) 6000 C
(C) Cv = (R + 1)/  (D) Cp = / (– 1)
17. For a gas Cv = 4.96 cal/mole K, the increase in internal energy of 2 mole gas in heating
from 340 K to 342 K will be :-
(A) 27.80 Cal (B) 19.84 Cal (C) 13.90 Cal (D) 9.92 Cal
18. Most accurate values are :-

(A) CP = 3, CV = 1 (B) CP = 5, CV = 3 (C) CP = 4, CV = 5 (D) CP = 6, CV = 2
19. If the temperature of a body is 140°F, its value in °C will be :-

(A) 108°C (B) 32°C (C) 140°C (D) 60°C
20. 50 gm. of ice at 0° C is mixed with 50 gm. of water at 100° C. The final temperature of
mixture is :–
(A) 0° C (B) Between 0° C to 20°C
(C) 20° C (D) Above 20° C
21. A Carnot engine works between temperature 727°C and 27°C. The efficiency of the engine
is :
(A) 70% (B) 35% (C) 90% (D) 100%
22. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is heated at a constant pressure of one atmosphere
from 0°C to 100°C. Then the change in the internal energy is
I A
D
(A) 20.80 × 102 J (B) 12.48 × 102 J (C) 832 × 102 J (D) 6.25 × 102 J
23. A carnot engine working between 300 K and 600 K has work out put of 800 J per cycle. The
N
amount of heat and energy supplied to the engine from source per cycle will be :
I
(A) 800 J (B) 1600 J (C) 1200 J (D) 900 J
S
24. If the system takes 100 Cal. heat, and releases 80 cal to sink, if source temperature is
127°C find the sink temp. :–
(A) 47° C (B) 127° C (C) 67° C (D) 107° C
(A) P
O O
25. The isothermal Bulk modulus of an ideal gas at pressure P is :-
(B) P (C) P/2
26. The specific heat of a gas at constant pressure is more than that of the same gas at
(D) P/
E T
constant volume because :-
(A) Work is done in the expansion of the at constant pressure
(B) Work is done in the expansion of the gas at contant volume
(C) The molecular attraction incrcase under constant pressure
(D) The vibration of molecules increases under constant pressure
27. When a system changes from one to another state the value of work done :-
(A) Depends on the force acting on the system
(B) Depends on the nature of material present in a system
(C) Does not depend on the path (D) Depends on the path
28. In an isothermal thermodynamical process, the value of work done by a system is

(A) Dependent on the path
(B) Equal to the amount of energy absorbed or ejected.
(C) Equal to the area between PV curves and V-axis
29. A mass of a gas at 00 C is expanded adiabatically so that its volume becomes 4 times the
original the temperature of gas will fall : ( = 1.5)
(A) 136.5 K (B) 9.8 K (C) 65 K (D) 32 K
30. If 2 gm moles of a diatomic gas and 1 gm mole of a mono-atomic gas are mixed then the
value of (= Cp/Cv) for mixture will be :–
(A) 13/19 (B) 19/13 (C) 7/5 (D) 5/3
31. In a water fall the water falls from a height of 100 m. If the entire energy of water is converted
into heat. The rise in temp. of water will be :–
(A) 0.23° C (B) 0.46° C (C) 2.3° C (D) 0.023° C
32. A bottle is filled with water at 30° C on opening in at moon than :–

(A) Water will freezee (B) Water will boil
I A
D
(C) Water will decompose in H2 and O2 (D) Nothing will happen to water
33. A gas mixture contain 1 gm. H2 and 1 gm. He if temp. of gas mixture increase 0° C to 100°
N
C at isobaric process. Than find given heat of gas mixture
I
[He = 5/3, H2 = 7/5, R = 2 cal/molek]
(A) 124 Cal. (B) 327 Cal. (C) 218 Cal. (D) 475 Cal.
(A) Work done is zero
O
(C) Heat is supplied to it S
34. When a gas is adiabatically compressed then it's temp. increase because :–
(B) Internal energy increased
(D) No change in pressure
35. Air is filled in a tube of the wheel of a car at 27° C and 2 atm pressure if the tube is
suddenly bursts, the final temp. of air will be :– ( = 1.5, 21/3 = 1.251)
36.
TO
(A) – 33° C (B) 0° C (C) 21.6° C (D) 240° C
If the coefficient of Linear expansion of a solid is 0.00009. Its coefficient of volume expansion
is :
E
(A) 0.009 (B) 0.02 (C) 0.03 (D) 0.00027
37. Specific heat of a gas undergoing adiabatic change is :

(A) Zero (B) Infinite (C) Positive (D) Negative
38. A quantity of air ( = 1.4) at 27°C is compressed suddenly, the temperature of the air
system will :
(A) Fall (B) Rise
(C) Remain unchanged (D) First rise and then fall
39. The efficiency of carnot engine is 50% and temperature of sink is 500K. If temperature of
source is kept constant and its efficiency raised to 60%, then the required temperature of
the sink will be :-
(A) 100 K (B) 600 K (C) 400 K (D) 500 K
40. A gas speciman in one vessel is expended isothermally to double its volume and a simillar
specimen in the second vessel is expanded adiabatically the same extent, then :
(A) In the second vessel, both pressure and work done are more
(B) In the second vessel, pressure in more, but the work done isless.
(C) In the first vessel, both pressure & work done are more.
(D) In the first vessel, pressure is more, but work done is less
41. The adiabatic elasticity (E  ) of H2 gas (=1.4) under normal temperature and pressure
will be :
(A) 1 x 105 N/m2 (B) 1 x 10-8 N/m2 (C) 1.4 N/m2 (D) 1.4 x 105 N/m2
42.
converted into heat. If the whole heat is acquired by the bullet, the rise in temperature will
be:–
I A
A bullet moving with velocity v collides against wall. consequently half of its kinetic energy is
D
(A) v2/4JS (B) 4v2 / 2JS (C) v2 / 2JS (D) v2 / JS
43. An increase in temperature (t) is obtained in adiabatic compression of n moles of an ideal

gas. The amount of work done in this process will be :
(A) nRt/ (B) – nR t/( – 1)
I
(C) t/ nR ( – 1)
N
(D) nRt/( + 1)
S
44. A system is taken along the paths A and B as shown. If the amounts of heat given in these
processes are QA and QB respectively then :-
O O P
I
A
f
T
B
V
E
(A) QA = QB (B) QA  QB (C) QA < QB
45. The amount of heat required to convert 1 gm of ice at 0°C into steam at 100°C, is
(A) 716 cal. (B) 500 cal. (C) 180 cal. (D) 100 cal.
46. At constant pressure wokdone in changing the volume from V1 to V2 is :-

(D) QA > QB
V2 P V2 V2
(A) PV In V (B) In V (C) P In V (D) P (V2 – V1)
1 V 1 1
47. If an ideal gas compressed during isothermal process then :-

(A) No work is doen against gas (B) heat is rejected by gas
(C) It's internal energy will increase (D) Pressure does not change
48. The volume of a metal sphere increases by 0.15 % when its temperature is raised by
24°C.The coefficient of linear expansion of metal is :
(A) 2.5 × 10–5 /°C (B) 2.0 × 10–5 /°C
(C) –1.5 × 10–5 /°C (D) 1.2 × 10–5 /°C
49. If the heat of 110 J is added to a gaseous system, change in internal energy is 40 J, then
the amount of external work done is :
(A) 180 J (B) 70 J (C) 110 J (D) 30 J
50. A refrigerator works between temperature –10°C and 27°C, the coefficient of performance
is :
(A) 7.1 (B) 1 (C) 8.1 (D) 15.47
51. Two moles of monoatomic gas are mixed with 1 mole of a diatomic gas. Then  for the
mixture is:
I A
D
(A) 1.4 (B) 1.55 (C) 1.62 (D) 1.67
52. The correct equation of state for an adiabatic process is :-
N
(A) TV–1 = constant (B) TV = constant (C) TV–1 = constant (D) TP = constant
53. As shown in the diagram for a closed path ABCA :
P2
S
A I
O O P
P1
B C
E T
(A) The amount of work done is zero
1
(B) The amount of work done is = – (P2–P1) (V2–V1)
2
V1 V V2
(C) The amount of work done is = (P2-P1) (V1-V2).

1
(D) The amount of work done is = (P -P ) (V2-V1).
2 2 1
54. Graphs between PV diagram for isothermal and adiabatic processes are drawn the rela-
tion between their slopes will be :–
(A) Slope of adiabatic curve=(slope of isothermal curve)
(B) Slope of isothermal curve = (slope of adiabatic curve)
(C) Slope of isothermal curve = slope of adiabatic curve
(D) Slope of adiabatic curve = 2 (slope of isothermal curve)
55. The correct value of 0°C on kelvin scale is :

(A) 273.15 K (B) 273 K (C) 273.05 K (D) 273.62 K
56. If an ideal flask containing hot coffee is shaken, the temperature of the coffee will :
(A) decrease
(B) increase
(C) remain same
(D) decrease if temperature is below 4°C and increase if temperature is equal to or more
than 4°C.
57. Water is used to cool the radiators of engines in cars because :
A
(A) of its low boiling point (B) of its high specific heat
58.
(C) of its low density (D) of its easy availability
D
An ideal gas heat engine operater in carnot cycle between 227°C and6127°C. It absorbs 6
× 104 cals of heat at higher temperature Amount of heat converted to work is.
(A) 2.4 × 104 cals (B) 6 × 104 cals (C) 1.2 × 104 cals (D) 4.8 × 104 cals
I
59.
I N
An ideal gas is taken round the cycle ABCA. In the cycle the amount of work done involved
is :–
O
P
4P1
A
S
O
P1 B
C
60.
E T
(A) 12 P1V1 (B) 6 P1V1
V1 3V1
(C) 3 P1V1
P
One mole ideal gas is compressed adiabatically at 27°C. Its temperature becomes 102°C.
(D) P1V1
The work done in this process will be :- ( = 1.5)

(A) –625 J (B) 625 J (C) 1245 J (D) –1245 J
61. The latent heat for vapourisation of 1 gm water is 536 cal. Its value in Joule/kg will be :-
(A) 2.25 × 106 (B) 2.25 × 103 (C) 2.25 (D) None of these
62. In an isometric change :

(A) Q = dU (B) W = dU (C) Q + W = dU (D) None of these
63. If amount of heat supplied is Q work done is W and change in internal energy is mCV
dT. Than the relation among them is & (Cv = gm specific heat)
(A) mCV dT = Q + W (B) Q = W + mCV dT
(C) Q + mCV dT = W (D) None of these.
64. The volume of a gas expands by 0.25 m at a constant pressure of 103 N/m2 . The work
3
done is equal to
(A) 2.5 erg (B) 250 J (C) 250 W (D) 250 N
65. An ideal gas goes from state A to state B via three different processes as indicated in the P-
V diagram
P A
2
1
I A
D
B
3
V
I N
If Q1 , Q2, Q3 indicate the heat absorbed by the gas along the three processes and U1,
U2, U3 indicate the change in internal energy along the three processes respectively,
S
then :-
(A) Q1 = Q2 = Q3 and U1 > U2 > U3 (B) Q3 > Q2 > Q1 and U1 > U2 > U3
(C) Q1 > Q2 > Q3 and U1 = U2 = U3 (D) Q3 > Q2 > Q1 and U1 = U2 = U3
66.
O
The process in which the heat given to a system is completely transformed into work is for
O
ideal gas :–
(A) Isobaric process
(C) Isothermal process
(B) Isometric process
(D) Adiabatic process
67.
68.
E T
The translational kinetic energy of molecules of one mole of a monoatomic gas is U=3NKT/
2. The value of atomic specific heat of gas under constant pressure will be :
(A) 3/2 R (B) 5/2 R (C) 7/2 R (D) 9/2 R
The volume of a poly-atomic gas ( = 4/3) compressed adiabatically to 1/8th of the original
volume. If the original pressure of the gas is P0 the new pressure will be .
(A) 8 P0 (B) 16 P0 (C) 6 P0 (D) 2 P0
69. During isothermal, isobaric and adiabatic processes, work done for same change in vol-
ume will be maximum for :-
(A) Isothermal
(B) Isobaric
(C) Adiabatic
70. An ideal monoatomic gas is taken round the cycle ABCDA as shown in following P - V
diagram. The work done during the cycle is :
3P,V 3P,3V
A B
P D C
P,V P,3V
(A) PV (B) 2 PV
O V
(C) 4 PV
I
(D) Zero
A
71.
D
The (W/Q) of a carnot-engine is 1/6, now the temp. of sink is reduced by 62°C, then this
N
ratio becomes twice, therefore the initial temp. of the sink and source are respectively :-
I
(A) 33°C, 67°C (B) 37°C, 99°C (C) 67°C, 33°C (D) 97 K, 37 K
72. If 10 gm ice at 0°C is mixed with 10 gm water at 20°C, the final temperature will be :-
S
(A) 50°C (B) 10°C (C) 0°C (D) 15°C
73. If Q, E and W denote respectively the heat added, change in internal energy and the work
74.
O O
done in a closed cycle process, then :-
(A) E = 0 (B) Q = 0 (C) W=0 (D) Q=W=0
On a new scale of temperature (which is linear) and called the W scale, the freezing and
T
boiling points of water are 39°W and 239°W respectively. What will be the temperature on
the new scale, corresponding to a temperature of 39°C on the Celsius scale ?
(A) 200° W (B) 139° W (C) 78° W (D) 117°W
E
75. In thermodynamic processes which of the following statement is not true :-
(A) In an adiabatic process PV= constant
(B) In an adiabatic process the system is insulated from the surroundings
(C) In an isochoric process pressure remains constant
(D) In an Isothermal process the temperature remains constant
76. The internal energy change in a system that has absorbed 2 Kcals of heat and 500 J of
work done is :-
(A) 7900J (B) 8900J (C) 6400J (D) 5400J
77. If U and W represent the increase in internal energy and work done by the system
respectively in a thermodynamical process, which of the following is true ?
(A) U = –W, in a isothermal process (B) U = –W, in a adiabatic process
(C) U = W, in a isothermal process (D) U = W, in a adiabatic process
78. A monoatomic gas at pressure P1 and volume V1 is compressed adiabatically to 1/8th its
original volume. What is the final pressure of the gas :-
(A) P1 (B) 16P1 (C) 32 P1 (D) 64 P1
79. If cp and cv denote the specific heats (per unit mass) of an ideal gas of molecular weight
M:-
A
(A) cp – cv = R (B) cp – cv = R/M (C) cp – cv = MR (D) cp – cv = R/M2
80.
where R is the molar gas constant
a and b is (where cP & cV are gram specific heat)

(A) a = 16 b (B) b = 16 a (C) a = b
D
For a hydrogen gas6cP – cV = a and for a oxygen gas cP – cV = b then the relation between
(D) None of these

I
81.
I N
A carnot engine shows efficiency of 40% on taking energy at 500 K. To increase the efficiency
to 50%, at what temperature it should take energy ?
S
(A) 400 K (B) 700 K (C) 600 K (D) 800 K
82. In an adiabatic process the quantity which remains constant is :-
O
(A) Temperature (B) Pressure
(C) Total heat content of the system (D) Volume
O
83. Graph of isometric process is :-
T P P P P
E
(A) (B) (C) (D)
T T T T
84. Specific heats of monoatomic and diatomic gases are same and satisfy the relation which
is :-
(A) Cp(mono) = Cp (dia) (B) Cp(mono) = Cv (dia)
(C) Cv(mono) = Cv(dia) (D) Cv(mono) = Cp(dia)
85. Oxygen boils at –183°C. This temperature is approximately in Fahrenheit is :-

(A) –329°F (B) –261°F (B) –215°F (D) –297°F
86. 420 joule of energy supplied to 10 gm of water will raise its temperature by nearly :-
(A) 1°C (B) 4.2°C (C) 10°C (D) 42°C
87. An ideal gas undergoes an adiabatic change in volume (V) with pressure (P). Then :-
(A) PV = constant (B) PV = constant (C) (PV) = constant (D) PV = constant
88. During an isothermal expansion, a confined ideal gas does +150 J of work in its surroundings.
This implies that :-
(A) 150 J of heat has been removed from the gas
(B) 300 J of heat has been added to the gas
(C) No heat is transferred because the process is isothermal
A
(D) 150 J of heat has been added to the gas
89. When 1kg of ice at 0°C melts to water at 0°C, the resulting change in its entropy, taking
latent heat of ice to be 80 Cal/g, is -
(A) 273 Cal/K (B) 8 × 104 Cal/K (C) 80 Cal/K
D
(D) 293 Cal/K I
N
90. A mass of diatomic gas ( = 1.4) at a pressure of 2 atmospheres is compressed adiabatically
I
so that its temperature rises from 27°C to 927°C. The pressure of the gas in the final state
is :-
S
(A) 8 atm (B) 28 atm (C) 68.7 atm (D) 256 atm
91. 300 calories of heat is supplied to raise the temperature of 50 gm of air from 20°C to 30°C
O
without any change in its volume. Change in internal energy per gram of air is
(A) zero (B) 0.6 calories (C) 1.2 calories (D) 6.0 calories
TO
92. The thermal capacity of any body is
(A) a measure of its capacity to absorb heat
(B) a measure of its capacity to provide heat
(C) the quantity of heat required to raise its temperature by a unit degree.
E
(D) the quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of the body by a unit
degree.
93. The work done by a gas taken through the closed process ABCA, see figure, is
P
5P0 A
P0 B
C
V
2V0 5V0
(A) 6P0V0 (B) 4P0V0 (C) P0V0 (C) zero
94. One mole of an ideal gas goes from an initial state A to final state B via two processes. It
first undergoes isothermal expansion from volume V to 3V and then its volume is reduced
from 3V to V at constant pressure. The correct P-V diagram representing the two processes
is :-
A A
P B P B
(A) (B)
A
V 3V V 3V
I
V V
P A
B
P
A
N D
(C)
V
V
3V
S I (D) B
V
V
3V
95.
O O
A thermodynamic system is taken through the cycle ABCD as shown in figure. Heat rejected
by the gas during the cycle is :-
(A) 1/2 PV 2P D C
Pressure
(B) PV
T
(C) 2PV
(D) 4PV P B
A
E
V 3V
Volume
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. C A A A D A A D A A A A B C B
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. B B B D B A B B A A A D D A B
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. A B D B A D A B C C D A B D A
Que. 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. D B B B A B C B A A B B C C D
Que. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
A
Ans. A A B B C C B B B C B C A D C
I
Que. 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
Ans. A B C B A C C C B D C B D D D
Que. 91 92 93 94 95
Ans. D C A B C
N D
S I
O O
E T
EXERCISE-II
1. A body of mass 5 kg falls from a height of 30 metre. If its all mechanical energy is changed
into heat, then heat produced will be:-
(A) 350 cal (B) 150 cal (C) 60 cal (D) 6 cal
2. For an adiabatic expansion of a perfect gas, the value of P/P is equal to:-
(A)   V/V (B) – V/V (C) –  V/V (D) – 2 V/V
3. An ideal gas at 270C is compressed adiabatically to 8/27 of its original volume. If  = 5/3,
A
then the rise in temperature is:- (IMP.)
I
(A) 450 K (B) 375 K (C) 675 K (D) 405 K
4. The temperature of 5 moles of a gas which was held at constant volume was changed from
capacity of the gas at constant volume will be equal to:-

(A) 8 J/K (B) 0.8 J/K (C) 4.0 J/K
N D
1000C to 1200C. The change in internal energy was found to be 80 joules. The total heat
(D) 0.4 J/K
5.
S I
Equal volumes of a perfect gas are compressed to half of their initial valumes. The first is
brought about by isothermal process and the second by adiabatic process then :
(A) Both temperature and pressure will increase in the isothermal process.
(B) In the isothermal process, the temperature will decrease and pressure will increases
O
(C) Both temperature and pressure will increasein adiabatic process
(D) In the adiabatic process, the temperature will diminish and pressure will increase
O
6. If the ratio of specific heat of a gas at constant pressure to that at constant volume is , the
change in internal energy of a mass of gas, when the volume changes from V to 2 V at
T
constant pressure P, is :-
(A) R/( - 1) (B) PV (C) PV/( - 1) (D) PV/( - 1)
7.
8.
E
The molar specific heat under constant pressure of oxygen is CP = 7.03 cal/mole k. The
quantity of heat required to raise the temperature from 100 C to 200 C of 5 moles of oxygen
under constant volume will approximately be :-
(A) 25 cal. (B) 50 cal. (C) 250 cal. (D) 500 cal.
The amount of heat required in converting 1 gm ice at -100 C into steam at 1000 C will be :–
(A) 3028 J (B) 6056 J (C) 721 J (D) 616 J
9. In a process, 500 calories of heat is given to a system and at the same time, 100 joules of
work is done on the system. The increases in the internal energy of the system is :-
(A) 40 calories (B) 1993 joules (C) 2193 joules (D) 82 calories
10. If DA and BC are adiabatic curves and AB and CD are isothermal curves then :–
(A) Temperature A and C will be same A
Pressure 
(B) Temperature at A is greater then that at B
B
(C) Temperature at B is greater then that at C D
C
(D) Temperature at A and D are same Volume 
11. 1 c.c. of water at its boiling point (100 0C) is converted into steam by supplying it 540
calories of heat the volume of steam is 1671 cc. If atmospheric pressure is 1.013 x 105 Nm-2
and J = 4.18 joule/cal the approximate value of heat that is required in overcoming the
molecular (Change in internal energy) attraction is :–
I A
D
(A) 110 cal (B) 500 cal (C) 40 cal (D) Zero cal
12. For monoatomic gas the relation between pressure of a gas and temperature T is P TC
N
where C is. (For adiabatic process)
I
(A) 5/3 (B) 2/5 (C) 3/5 (D) 5/2
S
13. 1 gm of water at 1000 C is converted into steam at 1000 C. The amount of external work
done by the system :
(A) 167 J (B) 40 J (C) 2100 J (D) None
14.
O O
Two identical masses of 5 kg each fall on a wheel from a height of 10m. The wheel disturbs
a mass of 2kg water, the rise in temperature of water will be :
(A) 2.6° C (B) 1.2° C (C) 0.32° C (D) 0.12° C
15.
T
A gas for which = 5/3 is heated at constant pressure. The percentage of total heat given
that will be used for external work is :
E
(A) 40% (B) 30% (C) 60% (D) 20%
16. With respect to the figures , no heat exchange between the gas and the surroundings will
take place, if the gas is taken along curve:
P
A C
B D
V
(A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D
17. In a thermodynamic process pressure of a fixed mass of a gas is changed in such a

manner that the gas releases 20 joules of heat and 8 joules of work was done on the gas.
If the initial internal energy of the gas was 30 joules, then the final internal energy will be:-
(A) 2 J (B) 42 J (C) 18 J (D) 58 J
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. A C B C C C C A C C B D A D A
A
Que. 16 17
I
Ans. B C
N D
S I
O O
E T
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
KINETICS THEORY
OF GASES
ETOOSINDIA
KINETIC THEORY OF GASES

EXERCISE–I
1. Two gases of equal molar mass are in thermal equilibrium. If Pa, Pb and Va and Vb are their
respective pressures and volumes, then which relation is true :–
(A) Pa Pb, Va = Vb (B) Va = Vb, Va Vb (C) Pa/Vb = Pb/Vb (D) PaVa = PbVb
2. The total kinetic energy of 1 mole of N2 at 27° C will be approximately :-

(A) 1500 J (B) 1500 Calories (C) 1500 kilo Calories (D) 1500 erg.
3. Equal volume of H2, O2 and He gases are at same temperature and pressure. Which of
A
these will have large number of molecules :-
(A) H2
(B) O2
(C) He
(D) All the gase will have same number of molecules
D I
N
4. 250 litre of an ideal gas is heated at constant pressure from 27° C such that its volume
I
becomes 500 liters. The final temperature is :
(A) 54° C (B) 300° C (C) 327° C (D) 600° C
5.
6.
Which of the following formula is wrong -
(A) C = R/–1
O
(B) Cp = R/–1
S (C) Cp/Cv = 
The root mean square velocity of the molecules of an ideal gas is :-

(D) Cp - Cv = 2 R
O
(A) RT / M w (B) 3RT / M w (C) 3RTM w (D) RT / 3M w
T
7. Mean kinetic energy (or average energy) per gm. molecule of a monoatomic gas is given
by :
E
(A) 3RT/2 (B) KT/2 (C) RT/3 (D) 3KT/2
8. Relation between the ratio of specific heats () of gas and degree of freedom 'f'' will be
1 1 1
(A)  = f + 2 (B)   (C) f = 2 / (-1) (D) f = 2( -1)
 f 2
9. At same temperature the rms velocity of H2 is 2 x 103 m /sec. What will be the rms velocity
of O2 molecules at the same temperature :-
(A) 103 m/sec. (B) 500 m/sec. (C) 0.5 × 104 m/sec. (D) 3 × 103 m / sec
10. For the molecules of an Ideal gas, Which of the following velocity average can not be zero
(A) < v > (B) < v4 > (C) < v3 > (D) < v5 >
11. The temperature at which root mean square velocity of molecules of helium is equal to root
mean square velocity of hydrogen at N.T.P is-
(A) 2730C (B) 273 K (C) 5460C (D) 844 K
12. Relation between pressure (P) and energy density (E) of an ideal gas is -
(A) P = 2/3 E (B) P = 3/2 E (C) P = 3/5 E (D) P = E
13. Speed of sound in a gas is v and r.m.s. velocity of the gas molecules is c. The ratio of v to
c is :–
(A) 3/ (B) /3 (C) 3/  (D)  /3
14. Critical temperature is that temperature

(A) Above which a gas cannot be liquified only by increasing pressure
(B) Above which the gas can be liquified only by increasing pressure
I A
(C) Below which the gas cannot be liquified only by increasing pressure
N D
I
15. A box contains N molecules of a gas. If the number of molecules is doubled, then the
pressure will:-
S
(A) Decrease (B) Be same (C) Be doubled (D) Get tripled
16. Gases obey vander -waal's equation at :
O
(A) Only normal temperature and pressure
(B) Only high temperature and high perssure
(C) Only high temperature and low pressure
O
(D) All temperature and pressure
T
17. Absolute zero temperature is one at which-
(A) All liquids convert into solid
E
(B) All gases convert to solid
(C) All matter is in solid state
(D) The K.E. of as molecules becomes zero
18. For a gas R/CV = 0.67. This gas is made up of molecules which are :
(A) Diatomic
(B) Mixture of diatomic and polyatomic molecules
(C) Monoatomic
(D) Polyatomic
19. If the total number of H2 molecules is double that of the O2 molecules then the ratio of total
kinetic energies of H2 to that of O2 at 300 K is :
(A) 1: 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 16
20. If f be the total degrees of freedom of the molecules of gas then the ratio of the specific
heats of gas is :-
(A) 1 + f / 2 (B) 1 + f / 3 (C) 1 + 2/ f (D) 1 + 3 / f
21. At which temperature of the following, does any gas has average moleculer kinetic energy
double that of at 20° C
(A) 40° C (B) 80° C (C) 313° C (D) 586° C
22. Consider a gas with density  and c 6as the root mean square velocity of its molecules
contained in a volume. If the system moves as whole with velocity v, then the pressure
exerted by the gas is
23.
(A) 1/3  (c)2 (B) 1/3 ( c + v)2 (C) 1/3 ( c – v)2
If the pressure of a gas is doubled with constant temperature, then the mean square veloc-
I A
(D) 1/3 (c–2 – v)2
D
ity will become :-
(A) No change (B) double (C) Four times (D) None of the above
I
24. The reason for the absence of atmosphere on moon is that the :
N
(A) Value of vrms of the molecules of gas is more than the value of escape velocity
(B) Value of vrms of gas is less than escape velocity
(C) Value of vrms is negiligible
O S
25. The kinetic energy associated with per degree of freedom of a molecule is-
(A) 1/2 MC2rms (B) KT (C) KT/2 (D) 3 KT/2
26.
TO
Root mean square velocity for a certain di-atomic gas at room temperature 270C is found to be 1930
m/sec. The gas is -
(A) H2 (B) O2 (C) F2 (D) Cl2
27.
28.
E
A balloon contains 500 m3 of helium at 27°C and 1 atmosphere pressure. The volume of
the helium at –3°C temperature and 0.5 atmosphere pressure will be -
(A) 500 m3 (B) 700 m3 (C) 900 m3 (D) 1000 m3
The speeds of 5 molecules of a gas (in arbitary units) are as follows 2,3,4,5,6 The root
mean square speed for these moecules is -
(A) 2.91 (B) 3.52 (C) 4.00 (D) 4.24
29. A vessel has 6g of oxygen of pressure P and temperature 400 K, a small hole is made in
it so that oxygen leaks out. How much oxygen leaks out if the final pressure is P/2 and
temperature is 300 K ?
(A) 3g (B) 2g (C) 4g (D) 5g
30. When temperature is increased from 0°C to 273°C, in what ratio the average kinetic energy
of molecules change ?
(A) 1 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 2
31. Which of the following statement is true according to kinetic theory of gases?
(A) The collision between two molecules is inelastic and the time between two collisions is
less than the time taken during the collision.
(B) There is a force of attraction between the molecules
(C) All the molecules of a gas move with same velocity
(D) The average of the distences travelled between two successive collisions is mean free
path.
32. The root mean square speed of the molecules of a gas is :

(A) Independent of its pressure but directly proportional to its Kelvin temperature
I A
D
(B) Directly proportional to the square roots of both its pressure and its Kelvin temperature
(C) Independent of its pressure but directly proportional to the square root of its Kelvin
temperature
N
(D) Directly proportional to both its pressure and its Kelvin temperature
(A) Are loosing their Kinetic energy

(B) Are getting stuck to the walls
(C) Are transferring their momentum to walls
I
33. Gas exerts pressure on the walls of container because the molecules-
S
O
(D) Are accelerated towards walls.
34. For a diatomic gas, change in internal energy for unit change in temperature for costant
TO
pressure and volume is U1 and U2 respectively. U1 : U2 is :
(A) 5 : 3 (B) 7 : 5 (C) 1 : 1
35. The presence of atmosphere on a planet means :- (Ves – escape velocity)

(D) 5 : 7
E
(A) Crms << Ves
(B) Crms > Ves
(C) The mass and density of planet are small
(D) Crms = 0
36. For a gas if  = 1.4, then atomicity Cp and Cv of the gas are respectively -
(A) Monoatomic, 5R/2, 3R/2 (B) Monoatomic, 7R/2, 5R/2
(C) Diatomic, 7R/2, 5R/2 (D) Triatomic 7R/2, 5R/2
37. The internal energy of an ideal gas depends on -

(A) Temperature, pressure and volume (B) Only on temperature and pressure
(C) Only on pressure and volume (D) Only on temperature
38. The specific heat of an ideal gas depends on temperature is-

(A) 1/T (B) T
(C) T (D) Does not depends on temperature
39. The specific heat of a gas :

(A) Has only two value Cp and Cv
(B) Has a unique value at a given temperature
(C) Can have any value between 0 and 
(D) Depends upon the mass of the gas
A
40. At 0° C temperature root mean square speed of which of the following gases will be
I
maximum:-
(A) H2 (B) N2 (C) O2 (D) SO2
D
41. For hydrogen gas Cp – Cv = a and for oxygen gas Cp – Cv = b. So the relation between a and
b is given by :– (Where CP, CV are molar sp. heat at const. pressure and const. volume)
42.
(A) a = 16b (B) b = 16a
I
(C) a = 4b
N (D) a = b
22 gm. of CO2 at 27° C is mixed with 16 gm. of O2 at 37° C. The temperature of the mixture
is :–
(A) 31.16° C
O
(B) 27° C
S
(C) 37° C
43. Relation PV = RT is given for following condition for real gas-

(A) High temperature and high density
(D) 30° C
(B) Low temperature and low density
O
(C) High temperature and low density (D) Low temperature and high density
T
44. A container of 5 liter has a gas at pressure of 0.8 m column of Hg. This is joined to an
evacuated container of 3 liter capacity. The resulting pressure will be :- (At constant temp)
E
(A) 4/3 (B) 0 .5 m (C) 2 . 0 m (D) 3/4 m
45. The root mean square speed of hydrogen molecules of an ideal hydrogen gas kept in a gas
chamber at 00C is 3180 m/s. The pressure of the hydrogen gas is :-
(Density of hydrogen gas is 8 .99 x 10-2 Kg/m3, 1 atmosphere = 1 .01 × 105 N/m2)
(A) 1.0 atmosphere (B) 1.5 atomsphere
(C) 2 . 0 atmosphere (D) 3 . 0 atomsphere
46. At 27° C temperature, the kinetic energy of an ideal gas is E1. If the temperature is in-
creased to 327° C, then kinetic energy would be
1
(A) 2 E1 (B) 1/2 E1 (C) 2 E1 (D) E1
2
47. Air is filled at 60° C in a vessel of open mouth. The vessel in heated to a temperature T so
that 1/4th part of air escapes. The value of T is :
(A) 80° C (B) 444° C (C) 333° C (D) 171° C
48. At a given temperature, the pressure of an ideal gas of density  is proportional to -

(A) 1/2 (B) 1/ (C) 2 (D) 
49. O2 gas is filled up in a cylinder. If pressure is increased 2 times temperature becomes four
times. then how much times their density will be :
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 1/4 (D) 1/2
A
50. Find the ratio of specific heat at constant pressure to the specific heat at constant volume
for NH3 :-
(A) 1.33 (B) 1.44 (C) 1.28 (D) 1.67
D
51. The variation of PV graph with V of a fixed mass of a ideal gas at constant temperature is
graphically represented as shown in figure :
I
(A) PV (B) PV
I (C) PV
N (D) PV
52.
O
V V
S V
The number of oxygen molecules in a cylinder of volume 1 m3 at a temperature of 27°C and

pressure 13.8 Pa is (Boltzmaan's constant k =1.38 × 10–23 JK–1) is :
V
53.
TO
(A) 6.23 × 1026 (B) 0.33 × 1028 (C) 3.3 × 1021 (D) None of these
A cylinder contains 10 kg of gas at pressure of 107 N/m2. The quantity of gas taken out of
the cylinder, if final pressure is 2.5 × 106 N/m2, will be : (temperature of gas is constant)
E
(A) 15.2 kg (B) 3.7 kg (C) zero (D) 7.5 kg
54. Hydrogen and helium volume V at same temperature T and same pressure P are mixed to
have same volume V. The resulting pressure of the mixture will be :
(A) P/2 (B) P
(C) 2P
(D) Depending on the relative mass of the gases
55. If the rms velocity of molecules of a gas in a container is doubled then the pressure will:-
(A) Become four times (B) Also get doubled
(C) Be same (D) Become one half
56. The root mean square velocity of a gas molecule of mass m at a given temperature is
proportional to –
1
(A) m° (B) m (C) m (D)
m
57. The equation of state for 5g of oxygen at a pressure P and temperature T, when occupying
a volume V, will be :– (where R is the gas constant.)
(A) PV = 5 RT (B) PV = (5/2) RT (C) PV = (5/16) RT (D) PV = (5/32)RT
58. vrms, vav and vmp are root mean square, average and most probable speeds of molecules of
A
a gas obeying Maxwellian velocity distribution. Which of the following statements is correct
I
(A) vrms < vav < vmp (B) vrms > vav > vmp (C) vmp < vrms < vav (D) vmp > vrms > vav
59. In kinetic theory of gases, it is assumed that molecules :-

(A) Have same mass but can have different volume
(B) Have same volume but masses can be different
(C) Have both mass and volume different
N D
I
(D) Have same mass but negligible volume
S
60. The volume of an ideal gas is V at pressure P and temperature T. The mass of each
molecule of the gas in m. The density of gas will be :-(K is Boltzmann's constant)
(A) mKT (B) Pm / KT (C) P / KTV (D) P / KT
61.
O O
Oxygen and hydrogen gases are at temperature T. Then the K.E of molecules of oxygen
gas is equal to how many times of K.E. of molecules of hydrogen gas :-
(A) 16 times (B) 8 times (C) Equal (D) 1/16 times
T
62. On increasing the temperature of a gas filled in a closed container by 10C its pressure
increases by 0.4%, initial temperature of the gas is-
E
(A) 250C (B) 2500C (C) 250 K (D) 25000C
63. If the r.m.s. velocity of hydrogen becomes equal to the escape velocity from the earth
surface, then the temperature of hydrogen gas would be-
(A) 1060 K (B) 5030 K (C) 8270 K (D) 104 K
64. The pressure exerted by a gas in P0. If the mass of molecules becomes half and their
velocities become double the pressure will become
P0
(A) (B) P0 (C) 2P0 (D) 4P0
2
 a 
65. In vanderwall's equation,  P  2  (V – b) = RT, the dimension of a is :-
V
(A) M1L5T–2 (B) M0L2T–3 (C) M1L3T–2 (D) M1L1T–2
66. The thermodynamic co-ordinates of a jar filled with gas A are P, V and T and another jar B
filled with another gas are 2P, V/4 and 2T, where the symbols have their usual meaning.
The ratio of the number of molecules of jar A to those of jar B is :
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 1 : 1
67. The root mean square (rms) speed of oxygen molecules O2 at a certain temperature T
A
(absolute) is v. If the temperature is doubled and oxygen gas dissociates into atomic oxygen.
I
The rms speed :
(A) becomes v/ 2 (B) remains v (C) becomes 2v (D) becomes 2v
68.
(A) 1.4 (B) 1.5 (C) 1.53
N D
If one mole of a mono-atomic gas ( = 5/3) is mixed with one mole of a diatomic gas ( = 7/
5), the value of  for the mixture is -
I
(D) 3.07
69. If the root mean square speed of hydrogen molecules is equal to root mean square speed
S
of oxygen molecules at 470C, the temperature of hydrogen is-
(A) 20 K (B) 47 K (C) 50 K (D) 94 K
70.
O O
At N.T.P. the volume of a gas is changed to one fourth volume, at constant temperature
then the new pressure will be :
(A) 2 atm. (B) 25/3 atm. (C) 4 atm. (D) 1 atm.
T
71. When an ideal diatomic gas is heated at constant pressure, the fraction of the heat energy
supplied which increases the internal energy of the gas is -
(A) 2/5 (B) 3/5 (C) 3/7 (D) 5/7
72.
E
A gas contained in a box of 0.1 m3 at atmospheric pressure is connected to another vessel
of 0.09 m3. Consequent change in pressure is X mm of Hg. Then X in metre is -
(A) 0.4 (B) 0.5 (C) 0.36 (D) 0.3
73. Temperature at which the velocity of sound in O2 is the same as that on N2 at 27°C is
approximately
(A) 60°C (B) 80°C (C) 70°C (D) 27°C
74. A gas is at 00 C . Upto what temperature the gas is to be heated so that the root mean
square velocity of its molecules be doubled.
(A) 273° C (B) 1092° C (C) 819° C (D) 100° C
75. The molar specific heat at constant pressure of an ideal gas is (7/2)R. The ratio of specific
heat at constant pressure to that at constant volume is :
(A) 7/5 (B) 8/7 (C) 5/7 (D) 9/7
76. Two balloons are filled, one with pure He gas and the other by air, respectively. If the
pressure and temperature of these balloons are same then the number of molecules per
unit volume is :-
(A) more in the He filled balloon (B) same in both balloons
(C) more in air filled balloon (D) in the ratio of 1 : 4
77. An electric fan is switched on in a closed room. The air in the room is :-
A
(A) Cooled (B) Heated
(C) Maintains its temperature
(D) Heated of cooled depending on the atmosphere
(A) CP – CV = r (B) CP – CV = R/J
D
78. Correct relation between molar specific heat at constant pressure and constant volume: I
N
r
(C) CP – CV = R (D) m CPdt – mCVdt = R
79. Find the correct relation in given P-V diagram :
S I
O
P
T2
T1
O
V
(A) T1 = T2 (B) T1 > T2 (C) T1 < T2 (D) T1 T2
(A) same
T
80. The root mean square and most probable speed of the molecules in a gas are :
E
(C) cannot say
81. The critical temperature of CO2 is-

(A) 31.1° C (B) 55°C
(B) different
(D) depends on nature of the gas
(C) 147.1°C (D) 273 K
82. At 10°C the value of the density of a fixed mass of an ideal gas divided by its pressure is
x. At 110°C this ratio is :-
(A) 10/110 x (B) 283/383 x (C) x (D) 383/283 x
83. According to Max well's law of distribution of velocites of molecules, the most probable
velocity is :-
(A) greater than the mean velocity (B) equal to the mean velocity
(C) equal to the root mean square velocity (D) less than the root mean square velocity
84. Mean free path of gas molecule at constant temperature is inversely proportional to ?
(A) P (B) V (C) m (D) n (number density)
85. Ideal gas and the real gas has major difference of :-
(A) Phase transition (B) Temperature (C) Pressure (D) None of them
86. The average energy of the molecules of a monoatomic gas at temperature T is :-

( K = Boltzmann constant )
(A) 1/2 KT (B) KT (C) 3/2 KT (D) 5/2 KT
87. A diatomic molecule has
A
(A) 1 degree of freedom (B) 3 degree of freedom
Que.
Ans.
(C) 5 degree of freedom
1
D
2
B
3
D
4
C
5
D
6
B
7
A
8
C
(D) 6 degree of freedom
9
B
10
B
D 11
A
12
A
13
D
I
14
A
15
C
N
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
I
Ans. D D C C C C A A A C A C D B D
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. D C C C A B D D C A D A C B D
Que.
Ans.
Que.
Ans.
Que.
46
A
61
C
76
O
47
D
62
C
77
48
D
63
D
78
49
D
64
C
79
50
A
65
A
80
51
D
66
A
81
52
C
67
D
82
S 53
D
68
B
83
54
C
69
A
84
55
A
70
C
85
56
D
71
D
86
57
D
72
C
87
58
B
73
C
59
D
74
C
60
D
75
A
O
Ans. B B B C B A B D A A C C
E T
NEET
PHYSICS
BY
NEERAJ KUMAR
CHAUDHARY
HEAT TRANSFER
ETOOSINDIA
HEAT TRANSFER
1. The m – T curve for a perfect black body is – 6. The original temperature of a black body is 727°C.
Calculate temperature at which this black body total
radiant energy, become double :
D B
(1) A (1) 971 K (2) 1190 K
C
(2) B m (3) 2001 K (4) 1458 K
(3) C
A
7. Calculate the energy radiated per minute from the
(4) D filament of an incandascent lamp at 2000K if the
T
2. The temperature of a furnace is 23240C and the inten- surface area is 5 × 10 –5 m 2 and its relative
sity is maximum in its radiation spectrum nearly at emittance is 0.85,  = 5.7 × 10–8 MKS units:
A
12000 A0. If the intensity in the spectrum of a star is (1) 1230 J (2) 2215 J
I
0
maximum nearly at 4800 A , then the surface tem- (3) 2115 J (4) 2325 J
perature of star is
8. Ratio of radius of curvature of cylindrical emitters of
D
(1) 84000C (2) 72000C same type is 1:4 and their temp. are in ratio 2:1. Then
(3) 6219.50C (4) 59000C ratio of amount of heat emitted by them is - (For Cylinder
length = radius)
N
3. A sphere a cube and a thin circular plate all made of
same substance and all have same mass. These are
I
(1) 2:1 (2) 1:1
heated to 200°C and then placed in a room, then the :
(3) 4:1 (4) 1:4
(1) Temperature of sphere drops to room temperature
S
at last. 9. A bucket full of hot water cools from 750C to 700C in
time T1, from 700 to 650C in time T2 and from 650C to
(2) Temperature of cube drops to room temperature at
600C in time T3, then
last
O
(3) Temperature of thin circular plate drops to room (1) T1 = T2 = T3 (2) T1 > T2 > T3
temperature at last (3) T1 < T2 < T3 (4) T1 > T2 < T3
(4) Temperature of all the three drops to room
O
10. The energy emitted per second by a black body at 270C
temperature at the same time
is 10 J. If the temperature of the black body is increased
T
4. A slab consists of two parallel layers of copper and to 3270C , the energy emitted per second will be :-
brass of the same thickness and having thermal (1) 20 J (2) 40 J
conductivities in the ratio 1 : 4. If the free face of
E
brass is at 100°C and that of copper at 0°C, the (3) 80 J (4) 160 J
temperature of interface is - 11. For a black body at temperature 727°C, its radiating
(1) 80°C (2) 20°C power is 60 watt and temperature of surrounding is
227°C. If temperature of black body is changed to 1227°C
(3) 60°C (4) 40°C
then its radiating power will be :-
5. Two metal rods, 1 & 2 of same length have same temp
(1) 304 W (2) 320 W
difference bet ween their ends, their thermal
conductivities are K1 & K2 and cross sectional areas A1 (3) 240 W (4) 120 W
& A2 respectively. What is required condition for same 12. A body cools from 60°C to 50°C in 10 minutes. If the
rate of heat conduction in them. room temperature is 25°C and assuming Newotn's
(1) K1 = K2 (2) K1 A1 = K2 A2 cooling law holds good, the temperature of the body at
the end of next 10 minutes is :
K1 K2 K1 K 2
(3) = (4) 2 = 2 (1) 45°C (2) 42.85°C
A1 A 2 1 2
(3) 40°C (4) 38.5°C
13. The temperature of hot and cold end of a 20 cm long 19. A liquid takes 5 min. to cool from 80°C to 50°C. How
rod in thermal steady state are at 100ºC and 20°C much time it take to cool from 60°C to 30°C“?
respectively. Temperature at the centre of the rod is Temperature of surroundings is 20°C –
(1) 50°C (2) 60°C (1) 10 min. (2) 20 min.
(3) 40°C (4) 30°C (3) 100 min. (4) 9 min.
14. Consider a compound slab consisting of two different 20. Energy is being emitted from the surface of black body
materials having equal thicknesses and thermal at 127°C the rate of 1.0 × 106 J/sm2. The temperature
conductivities K and 2K, respectively. The equivalent of black body at which the rate of energy is 16.0 × 106
thermal conductivity of the slab is J/sm2 will be :
4 (1) 754°C (2) 527°C
(1) 3K (2) K
3 (3) 254°C (4) 508°C
(3)
2
3
K (4) 2K
21.
I A
A cup of tea cools from 80°C to 60°C in one minute.
The ambient temperature is 30°C. In cooling from
60°C to 50°C. It will take :
D
15. Shown below are the black body radiation curves at (1) 50 sec. (2) 90 sec
temperatures T1 and T2 (T2 > T1). Which of the following
plots is correct :– (3) 60 sec. (4) 48 sec.
N
22. If m denotes the wavelength at which the radiative
I
emission from a black body at a temperature T K is
(1) (2)
maximum then :
S
(1) m T (2) m T2
(3) m T-1 (4) m T-2
(3) (4)
23. The area of the glass of a window of a room is 10m2
O
and thickness 2 mm. The outer and inner temperature
16. The radii of two spheres made of same metal are r and are 40°C and 20°C respectively. Thermal conductivity
2r. These are heated to the same temperature and placed of glass in MKS system is 0.2. The heat flowing in the
O
in the same surrounding. The ratio of rates of decrease room per second will be -
of their temperature will be
(1) 3 × 104 joules (2) 2 × 104 joules
T
(1) 1 :1 (2) 4 : 1 (3) 30 joules (4) 45 joules
(3) 1 : 4 (4) 2 : 1 24. If the coefficient of conductivity of aluminium is 0.5 cal/
E
17. If E is the total energy emitted by a body at a
cm-sec-°C, then in order to conduct
temperature T K and Emax is the maximum energy
10 cal/sec-cm2 in the steady state, the temperature
emitted by it at the same temperature, then -
gradient in aluminium must be
(1) E T4; Emax T5 (2) E T4; Emax T–5
(3) E T–4; Emax T4 (4) E T5; Emax T4 (1) 5°C/cm (2) 10°C/cm
(3) 20°C/cm (4) 10.5°C/cm
18. The ratio of the diameters of two metallic rods of the
same metarial is 2 : 1 and their lengths are in the ratio 25. Two spheres P and Q, of same colour having radii 8 cm
1 : 4. If the temperature difference between their are and 2 cm are maintained at temperatures 127°C and
equal, the rate of flow of heat in them will be in the 527°C rspectively. The ratio of energy radiated by P
ratio -
and Q is –
(1) 2 : 1 (2) 4 : 1
(1) 0.054 (2) 0.0034
(3) 8 : 1 (4) 16 : 1
(3) 1 (4) 2
ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
An s. 2 3 1 1 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 2 1 2 1
Que. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
An s. 4 1 4 4 2 4 3 2 3 3
I A
N D
S I
O O
E T

NKC 11 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

NKC 11 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

NEET

2. Graph of equation 3x – 2y + 4 = 0 is–

(1) (2) (3) x (4) x

6. In which part slope of graph is continuasly increasing–

9. Find A if 3 sin   4 cos   A sin(  )

(1) 1 (2) –1 (3)  (4) 0

12. The expression ax = b is equivalent to–

Find the value of  0.9961 / 4

(1) 0.992 (2) 0.996 (3) 0.249 (4) 0.999

(1) t (2) t (3) t (4) t

19. The graph of equation y = 2x – 4x2 is–

(2) 4 sin 4x  c (3) 

23. The value of sin 480° is–

If x = a cos t and y = b sin t then the relation between x and y is given by (a  b)

 sin 2 sin 2  cos 2  sin 2

30. The direction cosines of a vector ˆi  ˆj  2 kˆ are :-

32. A vector perpendicular to 4 i  3 j may be :

39. The unit vector along ˆi  ˆj is :

(1) F1 = 3N, F2 = 5N, F3 = 1N (2) F1 = 3N, F2 = 5N, F3 = 9N

11. The direction of the angular velocity vector is along :

12. What is the projection of 3ˆi  4kˆ on the y-axis ?

(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 5 (4) zero

13. ˆ is perpendicular to the vector (4ˆj  4iˆ  k)

(1) –1 (2) 1/2 (3) –1/2 (4) 1

in the figure. Which of the following statements is true ?

N (4) None of the above

(1)Zero only when P is at lowest point of graph

(1)5x0y0 (2)9x0y0 (3)3x0y0 (4)4x0y0

6. Two forces, each numerically equal to 10 dyne are acting as shown in

If A  B  0 and B  C  0 , then the angle between A and C may be :

(1) zero (2)

(4) none of these

16. What happens, when we multiply a vector by (– 2) ?

22 . The value of log y x  log x y is

The induced emf is given e  

. If  = sin t. The graph between emf ‘e’ and time ‘t’ is

the direction of velocity–

(3) A vector in opposite direction and having magnitude () times

29. If â  bˆ  3 , then â  bˆ may be :-

37 . The least value of 4 cos x + 3 sin x is

38 . What is the maximum value of (4 – cos ).

40. The sum of first ‘n’ natural numbers is given by

(A) inversely proportional to the square root of the displacement

i.e., 1,,( 2  1),( 3  2 ),( 4  3 ) .......

(A) 2250 (B) 3084 (C) – 2250 (D) – 3084

(A) 2 ms–1 (B) 4 ms–1 (C) 6 ms–1

(A) 1km (B) 10km (C) 100km (D) 60 km

32. In above question covered height by the rocket before retardation is :–

34. In above question the retardation of rocket is :–

35. In above question the acceleration of rocket is :–

(A) Speed (B) Displacement (C) Acceleration (D) Momentum

GROUND TO GROUND PROJECTI ON

(C) horizontal velocity(D) none of the above

range when fired at 45° with same speed :–

(A) u cos  (B) u tan 

projection. Its range on the horizontal plane :–

54. A projectile is thrown with an initial velocity of 

55. The equation of a projectile is y = 3 x –

(C) 45° (D) none

(C) 64 m (D) 12.8 m

(C) (400, 200) (D) (200, 200)

64. In the above, the change in speed is :–

66. In the Q.110, the maximum height attained by the arrow is :–